Home

Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Communication Adapter User Manual

1. PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700 Frames 2 and Larger SMC Flex PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 PowerFlex 700S Frames 2 through 6 Place ground HIM panel opens to ace g wire tab allow access to DPI between interface To open panel mounting remove screws on left screw and side of HIM panel and circuit board o o swing open PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger Item Description o0 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface cable DPI Connector Ethernet cable oo 2 54 cm 1 in Internal Interface cable Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 21 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein 4 Places PowerFlex 70 All Frame Sizes Adapter mounts in drive F 0 9 Nem i 4 d 8 0 Ibein fs PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 and 1 Power PowerFlex 700S Frames 0 and 1 Power Adapter mounts on door 0 9 Nem
2. Control Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Speed Feedback LSW N20 3 Speed Feedback MSW N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 724 725 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 726 727 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 728 729 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 730 731 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 732 733 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 734 735 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 736 737 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 738 739 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Speed Reference LSW N20 22 Speed Reference MSW N20 23 V
3. My PowerFlex Drive l Data INT 22 Input Image My PowerFlex Drvel Data INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 1 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 1295 INT Logic Status My_PowetFlex_Drive l Datal3 0 INT Not Used My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 25000 INT Feedback LSw My PowerFles Drivel Data 5 o INT Feedback MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 26970 INT Datalink Qut A1 LSW My PowerFles Drive l Data 7 17432 INT Datalink Out A1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 8 15562 INT Datalink Out A2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 5457 INT Datalink Out A2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 o INT Datalink Qut B1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 16840 INT Datalink Out B1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive l Dataf1 2 o INT Datalink Qut B2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 13 0 INT Datalink Out B2 MSW My PowerFlex Diive l Data 14 o INT Datalink Out C1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 15 o INT Datalink Out C1 MSW H My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 16 o INT Datalink Out C2 LSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 17 o INT Datalink Out C2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 18 o INT Datalink Qut D1 LSW My PowerFles Drive Data 13 o INT Datalink Qut D1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 20 E 0 INT Datalink Out D2 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive _Data 21 o INT Datalink Qut D2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O
4. No Name and Description Details 26 DPII O Act Default xxx0 0001 Displays the I O that the adapter is actively Bit Values ja xen transmitting The value of this parameter will Type Be dO i B usually be equal to the value of Parameter 25 ype Fag SIM DPI I O Cfg O O O o m Bi 2 28 zz i i Definition slsis g s z Z E am am o OO o Default X X xXx 0 0 1 Bit 7 6 5 3 2 0 27 Fit Cfg Logic Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Sets the Logic Command data that is sent to the Ae n ees E Pe drive if any of the following is true ax mum Type Read Write Parameter 23 Comm FIt Action is set to 4 Reset Required No Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is disrupted Parameter 24 Idle Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Parameter 43 Peer Flt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer I O communication is disrupted The bit definitions will depend on the product to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the documentation for the drive being used 28 Fit Cfg Ref Default 0 va t Minimum 0 Sets the Reference data that is sent to the drive if 9D Maximum 4294967295 any of the following is true Type Read Write Parameter 23 Comm FIt Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is disrupted Parameter 24 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle Parameter 43
5. No errors 128 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 29 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX16 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Write Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 9 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To write to a parameter of a
6. Code Event Description 1 No Event Empty event queue entry 2 Device Power Up Cold hard boot 3 Device Reset Warm soft boot 4 Config CRC Error Startup sequence detected corrupt NV storage 5 App Updated Startup sequence detected new application firmware in candidate area 6 Boot Updated Startup sequence detected new boot firmware in candidate area 7 FATAL Error A FATAL error was reported by the operating system 8 DPI Bus Off A bus off condition is detected on DPI 9 DPI Ping Timeout No Ping message was received on DPI for longer than the maximum time allowed 10 DPI Port Invalid The debounced DPI Pin ID is read as zero or seven after the peripheral has completed startup 11 DPI Port Changed The debounced DPI Pin ID has changed after the peripheral has completed startup 12 DPI Host Reset The drive issued a reset event 13 DPI Baud 125K The peripheral detects that the host is at 125 kbps 14 DPI Baud 500K The peripheral detects that the host is at 500 kbps 15 DPI Host Invalid Connected to a SCANport product and peripheral does not support a SCANport mode 16 DPI Dup Port Another peripheral with the same port number is already present 17 DPI Type 0 Logon The peripheral successfully logs in for Type 0 control 18 DPI Type 0 Time The peripheral has not received a Type 0 status message for longer than the maximum Type 0 time 19 DPI DL Logon The peripheral successfully logs into a data link 20 DPI DL Error The host rejects a login
7. Send N90 0 Size in Bytes Receive En Target Device Message Timeout Send Eo EB 1 Local Remote Local MultiHop ves Extended Routing Info File RIX Rp 21 0 Serice Service Code hex 4c Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex n deck 0 Attribute hex 0 deck o Enor Description No errors Ignore if timed out TO Break Connection BK Awaiting Execution EW Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Error Error Code Hex 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 10 91 100 73 139 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N80 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 30 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX21 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Custom Required for scattered mess
8. 1 2 Ifa controller is used to control the drive set adapter Parameters 37 M S Input and 38 M S Output for Master Slave Hierarchy For details see Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication on page 36 3 If Logic Command Reference is enabled configure the parameters in the drive to accept the Logic Command and Reference from the adapter For example set Parameter 90 Speed Ref A Sel in a PowerFlex 70 or 700 drive to 22 DPI Port 5 so that the drive uses the Reference from the adapter Also verify that the mask parameters for example Parameter 276 Logic Mask in the drive are configured to receive the desired logic from the adapter See the documentation for your drive for details The the SMC devices do not currently use the reference data sent in the IO frame No reference configuration is required Refer to the applicable SMC user manual for the latest reference configuration information Ifyou enabled one or more Datalinks configure parameters in the drive to determine the source and destination of data in the Datalink s When using Datalinks up to 8 Data In xx parameters and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters must be assigned to point to the appropriate parameters for your application See Chapter 4 for an example 5 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 The adapter is ready to receive I O You must now configure the adapter to receive I O
9. Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 700 700VC Series A and PowerFlex 700VC Series B drives PowerFlex 700H Installation Instructions publication PFLEX IN006 PowerFlex 700H Programming Manual publication 20C PM001 Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 700H drives 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P June 2013 Resource PowerFlex 700S w Phase Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 PowerFlex 700S w Phase I Control Installation Manual Frames 9 and 10 publication PFLEX IN006 PowerFlex 700S w Phase Control User Manual All Frame Sizes publication 20D UM001 PowerFlex 700S w Phase Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM002 PowerFlex 700S w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 1 6 publication 20D IN024 PowerFlex 700S w Phase II Control Installation Manual Frames 9 14 publication PFLEX IN006 PowerFlex 700S w Phase II Control Programming Manual All Frame Sizes publication 20D PMO001 PowerFlex 700S w Phase II Control Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM003 Preface Description Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 700S drives PowerFlex 700L User Manual publication 20L UM001 Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 700L Liquid Cooled AC drives SMC Flex Smart Motor Controller User Manual publicati
10. The example ladder logic programs in the sections of this chapter are intended for and operate PowerFlex 7 Class drives and SMC Flex controllers Functions of the Example Programs The example programs enable you to do the following Receive Logic Status information from the drive Send a Logic Command to control the drive for example start stop Senda Reference to the drive and receive Feedback from the drive e Send receive Datalink data to from the drive Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 87 Chapterb Using the 0 ControlLogix Controller Example 88 Logic Command Status Words These examples use the Logic Command word and Logic Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 drives See Appendix D to view details The definition of the bits in these words may vary if you are using a different DPI device See the documentation for your device Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later Because the device Add on Profile automatically created descriptive controller tags Figure 9 for the entire I O image in Chapter 4 you can use these tags to directly control and monitor the device without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the device and view its status you will need to create descriptive user defined Program tags Figure 19 and a ladder logic program t
11. Timed Out Lae The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4b Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Source Length Scattered Read Request 30 4 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered Read Response The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 3 4 Click Browse to find the p
12. option 15 16 or 17 Note that Reference Select is Exclusive Ownership see drive User Manual for more information Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 765 Status Description Ready 0 Not Ready Par 214 1 Ready Active 0 Not Active Running 1 Active Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating X Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 211 amp 212 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault Par 243 1 Fault X At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference Local Control 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port 3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Port 6 111 No Local 1 See Owners in drive User Manual for further information Reference 216 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 0000 Ref A Auto Par 90 0001 Ref B Auto Par 93 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 DPI 6 Manual 1111 Jog Ref Logic Command Status Words Appendix D
13. 2 All 1 0 data written to the DPI device read write 191 Input only 192 Listen only Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Revision WORD 2 2 Get Max Instance WORD 2 100 Set Control Timeout WORD Control timeout in seconds 183 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Number of WORD 1 Members 2 Get Member List ARRAY of STRUCT WORD Size of member data WORD Size of member path Packed EPATH Member path 3 Conditional Data Array of Bits Data to be transferred 4 Get Size WORD Size of assembly data in bits 1 For instance 1 access rule for the data attribute is Get For instance 2 it is Get Set Important Setting an assembly object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value Register Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x07 7 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Instance Description 1 All 1 0 data being read from the DPI device read only 2 All 1 0 data written to the DPI device read write 3 Logic Status and Feedback data read only 4 Logic Command and Reference data read write 5 Datalink A input data from device
14. ABETHER My PowerFlex Drive O Data INT 20 Output Image My PowerFles Drive D Data 0 0 INT i Logic Command My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 0 INT Not Used My PowerFlex Diive D Data 2 25000 INT Reference LSW My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 0 INT Reference MSW _ My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 o INT Datalink In A1 LSW My PowerFlex Diive D Data 5 16680 INT Datalink In A1 MSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 4430 INT Datalink In A2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 7 1909 INT Datalink In A2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 8 2621 INT Datalink In B1 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 16664 INT Datalink In B1 MSW o INT Datalink In B2 LSW 0 INT Datalink In B2 MSW PowerFlex 70 Drive PowerFlex 700S Series Drive For PowerFlex 7 Class drives the scaling may need to be multiplied by 10 or 100 depending on the parameter For more information see Using Datalinks on page 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 95 Chapterb Using the 1 0 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive 20 COMM ER Adapter 96 Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Parameter Value De
15. Figure 30 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Status N20 1 B3 g 0 0 _ Drive Active Status Active N20 1 B3 1 JE d N 1 PowerFlex 70 aa 3 3 Drives Status Reverse B3 1 cs 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Figure 31 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback Figure 32 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Logic Command PowerFlex 70 Drives Figure 33 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Example Ladder Logic Program for Speed Reference PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 103 Chapterb Using the 1 0 104 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use Explicit Messaging to configure and monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex 7 Class drive or SMC Topic Page About Explicit Messaging 106 Performing Explicit Messages 106 ControlLogix Controller Examples 108 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Examples 124 this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc
16. INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second 9 Get Set Custom Time Zone Data STRUCT of INT Standard bias BYTE Standard month BYTE Standard day of week BYTE Standard week BYTE Standard hour BYTE Standard minute BYTE Standard second INT Daylight offset BYTE Daylight month BYTE Daylight day of week BYTE Daylight week BYTE Daylight hour BYTE Daylight minute BYTE Daylight second 210 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Read Full STRUCT of STRING 16 Name of the timer LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless timer is a real time clock see STRUCT attribute 2 BOOL 16 See attribute 3 1 Get Timer Text STRING 16 Name of the timer 2 Get Set Timer Value LWORD or Elapsed time in milliseconds unless the timer is a real time clock STRUCT of Real Time Clock Data WORD Milliseconds 0 999 BYTE Seconds 0 59 BYTE Minutes 0 59 BYTE Hours 0 23 BYTE Days 1 31 BYTE Months 1 January 12 December BYTE Years since 1972 3 Get Timer Descriptor BOOL 16 BO
17. Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using the 1 0 Chapter 5 Table 12 Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700 VC Drives and SMC 50 Controllers Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Reserved N20 3 Speed Feedback N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 V
18. 137 Chapter 6 138 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 72 to store the response values that were read from the requested drive parameters Figure 72 Example Scattered Read Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive i Data File N60 dec Radix Decimal bs Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N60 m Properties Usage Help In this example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter Address Read Value 1 Output Freq N60 1 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current N60 4 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage N60 7 118 7 VAC 12 DC Bus Voltage N60 10 329 2 VDC 17 Analog In2 Value N60 13 8 318 mA MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 106 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limit
19. 26 DPI I O Act The Reference Feedback and Datalinks used by the adapter This value is the same as Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg unless the parameter was changed and the adapter was not reset voas alo m Bit 28g g E z Definition 2 2 2a 2 3 S Oj oo jadajac uS zizizi ia Default X Xx x 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 disabled Bit 765 413 2 1 1 1 0 enabled 50 Peer Inp Status The status of the consumed peer input connection Values 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted The adapter firmware can be updated over the network or serially through a direct connection from a computer to the drive using a 1203 USB or 1203 SSS serial converter When updating firmware over the network you can use the Allen Bradley ControlFLASH software tool the built in update capability of DriveExplorer Full software or the built in update capability of DriveExecutive software When updating firmware through a direct serial connection from a computer to a drive you can use the same Allen Bradley software tools described above or you can use terminal emulation software set to the X modem protocol If using a direct serial connection you can use DriveExplorer Lite software 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 To obtain a firmware update for this adapter go to http www ab com support abdrives webupdate This websit
20. 8 0 Ibein 4 Places eX mh Figure 4 Mounting and Grounding the Adapter Adapter Internal Interface Cable folded behind the adapter and in front of the drive Ground Tab Detail Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and is under the adapter before tightening screw After tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground Flex 700 Frames 2 and Larger Flex 700S Frames 2 through 6 Adapter mounts in drive Ground Tab Detail X2 eo p F Verify metal ground tab is bent 90 and is under e eO lo the adapter before tightening screw After d i NR tightening the screw verify continuity exists between the head of the screw and drive ground PowerFlex 700H Frames 9 and Larger PowerFlex 700S Frames 9 and Larger Adapter mounts behind HIM panel 22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Installing the Adapter Chapter 2 the Network contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove power from the drive and then verify power has been discharged before installing or rem
21. A value of 0 appears if the adapter does not currently have an IP address 37 IP Addr Act 1 255 255 255 255 39 IP Addr Act 3 IP Addr Act 2 40 IP Addr Act 4 IP Addr Act 2 IP Addr Act 3 IP Addr Act 4 Value of each byte in the adapter s present subnet mask A value of 0 appears if the adapter does not currently have a subnet mask 41 Subnet Act 1 255 255 255 255 42 Subnet Act 2 43 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 1 44 Subnet Act 4 Subnet Act 2 Subnet Act 3 Subnet Act 4 Value of each byte in the adapter s present gateway address A value of 0 appears if the adapter does not currently have a gateway address 45 Gateway Act 1 255 255 255 255 46 Gateway Act 2 47 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 1 48 Gateway Act 4 Gateway Act 2 Gateway Act 3 Gateway Act 4 49 EN Rx Overruns Number of receive buffer overruns reported by the Ethernet hardware 50 EN Rx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has received 51 EN Rx Errors Number of receive errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 52 EN Tx Packets Number of Ethernet packets that the adapter has sent 53 EN Tx Errors Number of transmit errors reported by the Ethernet hardware 54 Last TCP Reset Last reason that the adapter reset or rejected a TCP IP connection 55 Missed IO Pkts Number of incoming I O connection packets that the adapter did not receive Operating status of optional I O board in DPI External Comms Kit For the meanings of the in
22. BOOL 2 15 Not used WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 2 Get International Fault Text STRINGN Text describing the fault with support for Unicode DPI Alarm Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x98 152 206 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for alarms or warnings Adapters do not support this object Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of alarms supported by the queue The maximum number of alarms can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive Only host devices can have alarms 1 Most Recent Alarm 2 Second Most Recent Alarm Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of In
23. Click Connect to Drive to begin the correlation process After the drive configuration data has been verified a pop up dialog box appears which synchronizes ports from the online drive to the project to be sure that correct Datalinks are assigned 4 Click OK If the Differences Found screen appears which is typical click Download This will download the project settings from the controller to the drive and its connected adapter If Upload is clicked the drive and adapter settings are uploaded to the controller Differences Found Differences were found between the project and the drive How do you want to proceed Upload Download Heb ri Show Details TIP On subsequent connections to the drive after initial download click Upload 5 When the Reset Comm Module screen appears click Yes to reset the communication adapter so that the new I O settings take effect Reset Comm Module Datalink enable values have been downloaded to the Comm module Downloading new Datalink enable values requires the Comm module to be reset before the new settings will be activated Do you want to reset the Comm module now After resetting the communication module which may take up to a minute to complete the I O OK box in the upper left of the RSLogix 5000 window should now be steady green and the yellow warning symbols in Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 59 Chapter4 Configuring
24. Integral Communication Command Data Table Address Receive Size in Bytes Receive Target Device Message Timeout Bd Local Remote Extended Routing Info File RIX From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This MicroLogix Channel 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO CIP Gen eric Break Connection BK N40 0 k Local Service Read Parameter Class hex Instance hex Attribute hex Error Description No errors IRIXT5 0 Service Code dec MultiHop Awaiting Execution EW Send N A Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Error Error Code Hex 0 ps Ej 3 dec 3 E dec z The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter 2 3 General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 49 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 b
25. M1 0 Logic Command Word Logic Status Word N41 1 Reference least significant word Feedback least significant word N41 2 Reference most significant word Feedback most significant word N41 3 Datalink A1 least significant word Datalink A1 least significant word N41 4 Datalink A1 most significant word Datalink A1 most significant word N41 5 Datalink A2 least significant word Datalink A2 least significant word N41 6 Datalink A2 most significant word Datalink A2 most significant word N41 7 Datalink B1 least significant word Datalink B1 least significant word N41 8 Datalink B1 most significant word Datalink B1 most significant word N41 9 Datalink B2 least significant word Datalink B2 least significant word N41 10 Datalink B2 most significant word Datalink B2 most significant word 41 11 Datalink C1 least significant word Datalink C1 least significant word N41 12 Datalink C1 most significant word Datalink C1 most significant word N41 13 Datalink C2 least significant word Datalink C2 least significant word N41 14 Datalink C2 most significant word Datalink C2 most significant word N41 15 Datalink D1 least significant word Datalink D1 least significant word N41 16 Datalink D1 most significant word Datalink D1 most significant word N41 17 Datalink D2 least significant word Datalink D2 least significant word N41 18 Datalink D2 most significant word Datalink D2 most significant word N42 This N file l
26. PowerFlex 700S Drives Logic Command Word Phase Il Control Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Normal Stop 0 Not Normal Stop 1 Normal Stop x Start 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 1 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 1 Jog using Jog Speed 1 Par 29 x Clear Fault 0 Not Clear Fault 1 Clear Fault X x Unipolar Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control X Reserved X Jog 2 0 Not Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 1 Jog using Jog Speed 2 Par 39 X Current Limit Stop 0 Not Current Limit Stop 1 Current Limit Stop X Coast Stop 0 Not Coast to Stop 1 Coast to Stop X Reserved X Reserved X Spd Ref Sel Spd Ref Sert n P 14 13 12 X Spd Ref Sel2 0 0 0 Spd Ref A Par 27 0 0 1 Spd Ref B Par 28 0 1 0 Preset 2 Par 15 0 1 1 Preset 3 Par 16 1 0 0 Preset 4 Par 17 1 0 1 Preset 5 Par 18 1 1 0 Preset 6 Par 19 1 1 1 Preset 7 Par 20 X Reserved 1 A Not Stop condition logic bit 0 0 logic bit 8 0 and logic bit 9 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive 2 To perform this command the value must switch from 0 to 1 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 217 Appendix D 218 Logic Command Status Words Logic
27. Scattered_Write_Request 3 Scattered Write Request 4 Scattered Write Request 5 Scattered Write Request 5 Scattered Write Request 7 Scattered Write Request 8 Scattered Write Request 3 Scattered Write Request 10 Scattered Write Request 11 Scattered Write Request 12 Scattered Write Request 13 Scattered Write Request 14 INT 15 INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT INT Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value Parameter Value LSW MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value Parameter Value LSW MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value Parameter Value LSW MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value Parameter Value LSW MSW Parameter Number decimal Parameter Value Parameter Value LSW MSW Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Response Data The results of the message appear in the destination tag named Scattered Write Response Figure 46 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 46 Example Scattered Write Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name Value Data Type Description Scattered Write Response INT 15 Scattered Write Response U INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 1 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 2 INT Pad Word Scattered
28. Usingan DO DE ELUNES cse eicetak a PERI hx e ta 28 Using BOO EP i zderercodo quid un SERRE Oda dad us C RUNE 29 Configure the Adapter Using a BOOTP Server 29 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 32 Disable the BOOTP Feature eee 32 Set an IP Address Using Parameters ooi us sedes ed oua 32 Set a Subnet Mask Using Parameters 0000 0 cece eee es 33 Set a Gateway Address Using Parameters coser eret exse 33 Setting the Data Rates sees daa toa ERR ORA MGR ER eho tans 34 Setting the I O ConBgurdtiODes s cveeued se Te hb rc rx eee rires 35 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer i ieeesd esee ue eer eg Eyre n 36 Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy 36 Setting the Adapter to Transmit Peer to Peer Data 37 Setting the Adapter to Receive Peer to Peer Data 38 Setting the Reference Adjustment iiie rer eb uve eve sh P reu 4l Setting a Fault ACtoB esses snes Ro r E E bes ES EE RU ENS ER 41 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P June 2013 Table of Contents Configuring the 1 0 Using the 1 0 Changing the Fault Action o ex vores Cra Ns 42 Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters 08 42 Setting Web Access Control ld i ous La ee vise TRES ays esl 42 Resetting the Adapter oe se su stia eoo bes specu vue civ n dar 43 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 0000005 44 Updating the Adapter Fietwate 122
29. equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can injury or death property damage or economic loss Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequences drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g temperatures Allen Bradley Rockwell Software and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P June 2013 Preface Getting Started Installing the Adapter Configuring the Adapte
30. hardware failure Green Flashing Flash update in progress Red NS Off Steady No power OR no IP Address Green Flashing An IP address is configured but no CIP connections are established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Steady At least one CIP connection any transport class is established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out Red Flashing Connection has timed out see the The EtherNet Adaptation of CIP Specification sections 9 4 4 for detailed behavior description Steady Duplicate IP Address detected Orange Steady Adapter Failure used in conjunction with PS orange Green Flashing Self test on power up Red LS1 Off Steady No Network Activity Green Flashing Network activity at 100 Mbps Yellow Flashing Network activity at 10 Mbps LS2 Off Steady No Network Activity Green Flashing Network activity at 100 Mbps Yellow Flashing Network activity at 10 Mbps After verifying correct operation close or install the drive cover For more details on status indicator operation see page 144 and page 145 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 25 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter Commissioning the Adapter Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters The PowerFlex 7 Class drive can be separately configured for the control and Reference functions in various combinations For example you could set the drive to have its control come from a peripheral or te
31. publication 1785 UM012 Information to help design operate and maintain an Enhanced and Ethernet PLC 5 programmable controller system MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1763 UM001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers User Manual publication 1766 UM001 Information to install wire and troubleshoot the MicroLogix 1100 and MicroLogix 1400 controllers respectively Web Updates http Avww ab com support abdrives webupdate Flash Update Files Product Help Files Control Bar Files GSD Files EDS File links DriveTools SP Drive AOP Database Files and other downloads to keep your Allen Bradley brand drive products up to date 1 Use this link to the ODVA EtherNet IP library http odva org Home ODVATECHNOLOGIES EtherNetIP EtherNet PLibrary tabid 76 Default aspx Documentation can be obtained online at http literature rockwellautomation com To order paper copies of technical documentation contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative To find your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales representative visit http www rockwellautomation com locations For information such as firmware updates or answers to drive related questions go to the Drives Service amp Support web site at http www ab com support abdrives and click on the Downloads or Knowledgebase link Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P June 2
32. see Glossary on page 221 1 Set the value of Parameter 18 ENEN P2 Rate Config to the data rate at which your network is operating Port 5 Device Value Data Rate 20 COMM ER 0 Autodetect default Parameter 18 1 10 Mbps Full EN P2 Rate Config 2 10 Mbps Half Autodetect 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half TIP Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device usually a switch on the other end of the cable is also set to automatically detect the baud rate duplex If one device has the baud rate duplex hard coded the other device must be hard coded to the same settings 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 Setting the 0 The I O configuration determines the data that is sent to and from the drive C onfi gurati on Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks may be enabled or disabled Datalinks allow you to read write directly to parameters in the drive using implicit I O A I enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O 1 Set the bits in Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM ER 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 25 1 Datalink A DPI I O Cfg 2 Datalink B E ape o 4 Datalink D 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals
33. 0 Image 80 The terms input and output are defined from the controller point of view Therefore output I O is data that is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input I O is status data that is produced by the adapter and consumed as input by the controller The I O image will vary based on the following Size either 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback words and Datalink words used by the device To determine the size of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks view adapter Parameters 20 Ref Fdbk Size and 21 Datalink Size For information to access parameters see Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 28 Configuration of I O Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg Ifall I O is not enabled the image is truncated The image always uses consecutive words starting at word 0 e ControlLogix CompactLogix Controllers only The drive profile used in RSLogix 5000 software device Add on Profile in version 16 00 or later Classic Profile in versions 13 00 15 00 or Generic Profile in all versions ControlLogix Controller Image Since the device Add on Profile in RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later and the Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 provide descriptive controller tags the I O image tag size and location is automatically configured based on the device being used When using the Generic Profile page 62 in RSLogix 5000 software however controller tags are not descriptiv
34. 0x93 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 38 Parameter Write Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single_Write_Message Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Browse Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic hd Service Parameter Write X Source Element Accel Time 1 zi Type Source Length 2 E Bytes Service Fp Code 10 Hex Class ff Hex zj Instance 140 Attribute 1 Hex Reais Enable Enable Waiting Stat Eror Code Extended Error Code Eror Path Eror Text OK Cancel v nee Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access
35. 1 0 Chapter 4 Figure 9 Controller Tags Name amp Value Force Mask Style Data Type My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l I My PowerFlex 70 EC Diive l DriveStatus 240000 Binary My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Ready Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Active Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus CommandDir Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Accelerating Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Decelerating Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Alarm Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus Faulted Decimal My PowerFlex 7 EC Drive l DriveStatus AtSpeed Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus LocallDU Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus LocallD1 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus LocallD2 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflDO Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflD1 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflD2 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DriveStatus SpdReflD3 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DutputFreq Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DutputCurrent Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l DCBusVoltage Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Faultl Code Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive zu TE My _PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt 2 0000 Binary My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRslt
36. 226 I O about 79 configuring for ControlLogix controller 48 MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller 68 configuring the adapter for 35 definition 225 understanding the I O image 80 using with ControlLogix controller 88 MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller 96 PLC 5 controller 96 SLC 500 controller 96 Identity object 182 idle action 225 Idle Flt Action parameter 174 installation applying power to the adapter 24 commissioning the adapter 26 connecting to the drive 20 connecting to the network 23 preparing for 18 Internal Interface cables connecting to the adapter 21 connecting to the drive 21 illustration 21 IP Addr Cfg 1 4 parameters 172 IP address definition classes 226 setting with BOOTP 29 setting with parameters 32 L LCD HIM 28 LED HIM 28 LEDs see status indicators Link status indicator troubleshooting with 145 Index Logic Command Status bit definitions for PowerFlex 70 700 700H drives 215 PowerFlex 700S drives 217 definition 226 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 80 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controllers 82 using 84 M MAC address see hardware address manual conventions 7 related documentation 8 website 8 Master Slave hierarchy configuring adapter for 36 definition 227 mechanical dimensions 170 messages see explicit messaging or I O MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller configuring the I O 68 explicit messaging 124 limitations when using the I O 68 using the I O 96 mounting the adapter
37. 3 14 Get Scaling Divisor WORD 3 15 Get Scaling Base WORD 3 16 Get Scaling Offset WORD 3 17 Get Multiplier Link WORD 3 18 Get Divisor Link WORD 3 19 Get Base Link WORD 3 20 Get Offset Link WORD 3 21 Get Decimal Precision BYTE 3 Access rule is defined in Bit 4 of instance attribute 4 0 Get Set 1 Get Specified in descriptor data type and data size Value varies based on parameter instance See the EtherNet IP specification for a description of the link path Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 187 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Parameter Group Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x10 16 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes No Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of groups in the device A group of adapter parameters is appended to the list of groups in the device The total number of groups can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Group 1 Attributes n Last Drive Group Attributes n 1 Adapter Group Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Parameter group version WORD 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Total number of groups 8 Set Native Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German
38. 8 Create a ladder logic program Chapter 5 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to Using the O create a ladder logic program that enables you to do the Chapter 6 following Using Explicit Messaging e Control the connected device via the adapter by using 1 0 e Monitor or configure the device or SMC by using explicit messages 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 EMC Conformance Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter This chapter provides instructions for installing the adapter in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Topic Page Preparing for an Installation 18 Setting the Web Pages Switch 19 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive or SMC 20 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 23 Applying Power 24 Commissioning the Adapter 26 For all PowerFlex 70 and 700 drive installations that require CE conformance per EN61800 3 a ferrite core must be installed on each EtherNet IP cable connected to the drive These ferrites are not required for installation on SMC products A ferrite core such as FAIR RITE part number 2643803802 needs to be installed according to the following diagram Note the cable is wrapped 4 times around each core Figure 1 Ferrite Core Installation Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 17 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter Preparing for an Installation 18 Before installi
39. ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 23 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 41 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter Setting Web Access Control 42 Changing the Fault Action Set the values of Parameters 23 Comm Flt Action and 24 Idle Flt Action to any of these desired responses Value Action Description 0 Fault The device is faulted and stopped Default 1 Stop The device is stopped but not faulted 2 Zero Data The device is sent 0 for output data This does not command a stop 3 Hold Last The device continues in its present state 4 Send Fit Cfg The device is sent the data that you set in the fault configuration iid Parameters 27 Fit Cfg Logic through 36 FIt Cfg D2 Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM ER 20 COMM ER Parameter 23 Parameter 24 Comm Fit Action Idle Fit Action Fault Fault Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required If communication is disrupted and then is re established the drive will automatically take commands from the network again Setting the Fault Configuration Parameters If you set Parameter 23 Comm Flt Action or 24 Idle Flt Action to Send Flt Cfg the values in the following parameters are sent to the drive after an I O communications fault and or idle fault occurs You must set these parameters to values required by your app
40. Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Create MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout 1 In the RSLogix 500 project window treeview under Program Files double click on LAD 2 2 Insert a ladder rung 3 Double click on the rung to display the rung editor 4 Enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG10 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG10 0 Press Enter Insert another separate rung Double click on the rung to display the rung editor Enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG10 0 for the message created in steps 2 5 Cnn Ww Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown 9 Press Enter 10 In the MSG instruction Figure 13 double click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 14 Figure 13 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Control Timeout MSG Read Write Message CEN gt MSG File MG10 0 lt DN gt Setup Screen lt ER 5 MG10 0 MG10 0 J E U gt re EN DN EN MG10 0 a iE zn E ER 11 Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the
41. CO cd 63 64 65 Request Source Data Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word o e co 40 5014 C5 lo C Se a pet LEG 4A 05 n5 Oo oO 63 64 65 Response Destination Data Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Figure 48 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages o e c 405 0 Co n5 O ll 4A 05 n5 O do 63 64 65 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Request Source Data Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Pa
42. Control Timeout Message must be re sent 72 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Create MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out 1 Insert another separate rung 2 Double click on the rung to display the rung editor 3 Enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG11 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG11 0 Press Enter Insert another separate rung Double click on the rung to display the rung editor Enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG11 0 for the message created in steps 1 4 N WD V A Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown 8 Press Enter 9 Inthe MSG instruction Figure 15 double click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 16 Figure 15 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out MSG Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG11 0 DN5 Steps 5 8 Setup Screen CER 2 MG11 0 V d i CU XE DN EN MGI1 0 JE d E ER 10 Configure the General tab fields by entering or verify
43. Datalink B Input Coe DAE Eon 0 Of 3 Datalink C Input 4 Datalink D Input 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 3 Set the bits in Parameter 38 M S Output This parameter determines the data transmitted from the device to the scanner A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM ER 0 Status Feedback Default Parameter 38 1 Datalink A Output M S Output 2 Datalink B Output matte EM 2e e 0 Of 3 Datalink C Output 4 Datalink D Output 5 15 Not Used Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 4 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 36 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 The adapter is ready to receive I O from the master that is scanner You must now configure the scanner to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Setting the Adapter to Transmit Peer to Peer Data Drive to Drive Communication 1 Verify that Parameter 53 Peer Out Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure peer output parameters ff Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 53 1 On Peer Out Enable 2 Set Parameter 51 Peer A Output to select the source of the data to
44. EN P July 2013 207 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Instances The number of instances depends on the maximum number of diagnostic items in the device The total number of diagnostic items can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Diagnostic Item 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Diagnostic Item 2 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 DPIPort2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Diagnostic Item1 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD 1 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of diagnostic items in the device 3 Get ENUM Offset WORD DPI ENUM object instance offset Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of B00L 32 Descriptor see page 202 CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz WORD Multiplier 2 WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset DWORD Link source of the value
45. EN1 1336R REGENBrake EN1 1336 REGEN Brake via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDriveCNA EN1 1336 FORCE Drive ControlNet Adapter via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDrivePLC EN1 1336 FORCE Drive PLC Comm Adapter via 1203 EN1 1336T FORCEDriveStd EN1 1336 FORCE Drive Standard Adapter via 1203 EN1 1397DigitalDCDrive EN1 1397 Digital DC Drive via 1203 EN1 PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 70 E PowerFlex 70 Drive via 20 COMM E PowerFlex 700 Vector 200V E Wil Module Properties My EtherNet IP Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Power Setup Type PowerFlex 70 EC E PowerFlex 70 EC Drive via 20 COMM ER Vendor Allen Bradley Name My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Address Host Name Description PAddress 10 91 100 79 C Host Name Comm Format Datalinks Each datalink has two 4 isi inputs and two outputs size 16 bit Revision B 2 i Electronic Keying Compatible Keying Status Offline Cancel When Datalinks are used you must enable the desired Datalinks and assign names to their non descriptive controller tags When a Datalink is enabled you must set the following adapter I O parameters Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 37 M S Input turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will input that Datalink s informatio
46. EtherNet IP network you must configure settings in the BOOTP software to match the network Edit the following Box Type Subnet Mask The subnet mask for the adapter s network Gateway 1 The IP address of the gateway device on the adapter s network Primary DNS The address of the primary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices Secondary DNS Optional the address of the secondary DNS server to be used on the local end of the link for negotiating with remote devices when the primary DNS server is unavailable Domain Name The text name corresponding to the numeric IP address that was assigned to the server that controls the network 1 For definitions of these terms refer to the 5 Click OK to apply the settings Devices on the network issuing BOOTP requests appear in the BOOTP Request History list 30 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 6 In the BOOTP Request History list either double click the adapter s Ethernet Address MAC noted in Step 1 or click New in the Relation List The New Entry dialog box appears New Entry EthemetAddress MAC 00 00 BC 08 60 09 IP Address 10 91 100 79 20COMMEB 21A Bldg B Floor 2 Fan 1A OK Cancel Hostname Description In the first case the Ethernet Address MAC is automatically entered In the latter case you mus
47. Fault 2 Unexpected Loop Detect 3 Partial Network Fault 4 Rapid Fault Restore Cycle 10 Get Active Supervisor Address STRUCT of Ring supervisor UDINT Array of 6 USINT 12 Get Capability Flags DWORD 0x00000002 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 189 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Quality of Service Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x0048 72 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single Instances Get_Attribute_Single is implemented on both class and instance Set_Attribute_Single is implemented on instances Get_Attribute_All is not implemented The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes Attribute ID A essRule Name Data Type Value e Reo UNT Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Set 802 10 Tag Enable USINT 0 Disable default 1 Enable 4 Set DSCP Urgent USINT Default 55 5 Set DSCP Scheduled USINT Default 47 6 Set DSCP High USINT Default 43 7 Set DSCP Low USINT Default 31 8 Set DSCP Explici USINT Default 27 PCCC Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x67 103 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x4B No Yes Execute_PCCC 0x4 No Ye
48. Get International DPI Offline Parameter STRUCT of Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 19 Get International DPI Online Parameter STRUCT of Text STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International offline units 20 Get International DPI Online Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Online minimum value CONTAINER Online maximum value CONTAINER Online default value WORD Next WORD Previous WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BYTE 3 Link BYTE Pad word always zero BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN International parameter name STRINGN International online parameter units 21 Get DPI Extended Descriptor DWORD Extended descriptor see page 203 22 Get International DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset BOOL 32 Extended DPI descriptor STRINGN International DPI parameter name STRINGN International DPI
49. H nes 2 H nes 6 0 poi Cancel Help 5 Edit the following information about the drive and adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive and adapter Description Optional description of the drive adapter Comm Format Data INT This setting formats the data in 16 bit words IP Address The IP address of the adapter Open Module When this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties Properties screens to further configure the drive adapter When unchecked clicking OK closes the drive s New Module screen For this example check this box 6 Under Connection Parameters edit the following information Box Assembly Instance Size Input 1 The value will vary based on your application This value is required setting of Parameters 25 DPI I O Cfg and 38 M S Output and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive See Table 2 Table 3 or Table 4 on page 64 Output 2 The value will vary based on your application This value is required setting of Parameters 25 DPI I O Cfg and 37 M S Input and the size 16 bit or 32 bit of the Reference Feedback and Datalinks in the drive See Table 2 Table 3 or Table 4 on page 64 Configuration 6 0 This value is required This value is required The following tables define the number of 16 bit words that you need to enter for the Input Size a
50. Host 2 15 Peripherals on Ports 1 14 182 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Class Attributes Access Rule Name DataType Description 2 WORD Attribute ID Total number of instances Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Vendor ID WORD 1 Allen Bradley 2 Get Device Type WORD 123 3 Get Product Code WORD Number identifying product name and rating 4 Get Revision STRUCT of Major BYTE Value varies Minor BYTE Value varies 5 Get Status WORD Bit 0 Owned Bit 8 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 Major recoverable fault 6 Get Serial Number DWORD Unique 32 bit number 7 Get Product Name SHORT_STRING Product name and rating 8 Get State USINT Always returns 3 Operational 9 Get Configuration UINT For the Host Instance 1 the CCV is determined from the Host s Consistency Value NVS Checksum along with 20 COMM ER s NVS Checksum For DPI Peripherals Instances 2 15 the CCV is from the peripheral s NVS Checksum only Assembly Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x04 4 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances Instance Description Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 1 All 1 0 data being read from the DPI device read only
51. Image My PowerFlex Drive l Data Q INT Pad Word My PowerFlex Drive l Data 1 INT Pad Word My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 2 INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 INT Speed Feedback PowerFlex 70 Drive My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 4 INT Datalink Qut A1 16 bit Speed Feedback and My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 5 INT Datalink Out 42 2 My_PowerFlex Drive Data 6 INT Datalink Out B1 Datalinks My_PowerFlex_Drive Data INT Datalink Qut B2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Out C1 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 3 INT Datalink Out C2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 10 INT Datalink Qut D1 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 INT Datalink Out D2 Name amp Data Type Description My PowerFlex Drive l AB ETHER My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data INT 22 Input Image My PowerFlex Drive l Data 0 INT Pad Word My PowerFles Drive l Data 1 INT Pad Word My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 INT Logic Status My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 INT Not Used My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 INT FeedBack LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 INT Feedback MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 5 INT Datalink Qut amp 1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 7 INT Datalink Qut 1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Out 42 LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 9 INT Datalink Qut A2 MSW PowerFlex 700S Series Drive My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 10 INT Datalink Qut B1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 INT Datalink Out B1 MSW 32 bi
52. Not Used X Aux Enable 1 Use Aux 1 Aux 4 0 Ignore Aux 1 Aux4 X Aux 1 1 Aux 1 Active 0 Aux 1 Inactive X Aux 2 1 Aux 2 Active 0 Aux 2 Inactive X Aux 3 1 Aux 3 Active 0 Aux 3 Inactive X Aux4 1 Aux 4 Active 0 Aux 4 Inactive 220 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Glossary A Adapter Devices such as drives controllers and computers usually require a network communication adapter to provide a communication interface between them and a network such as EtherNet IP An adapter reads data on the network and transmits it to the connected device It also reads data in the device and transmits it to the network The20 COMM ER EtherNet IP adapter connects PowerFlex 7 Class drives and SMC controllers to an EtherNet IP network Adapters are sometimes also called cards embedded communication options gateways modules or peripherals B BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP lets the adapter configure itself dynamically at restart if the network has a BOOTP server The BOOTP server assigns the adapter a preconfigured IP address a subnet mask and a gateway address therefore you do not have to configure these with the parameters in the adapter BOOTP can make it easier to administer an Ethernet network A free version of the Rockwell Software BOOTP Server can be obtained at http www software rockwell com su
53. Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 316 Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Reserved N20 22 Speed Reference N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW
54. Parameter Settings The following drive and adapter settings were used for the example ladder logic program in this section Parameter Value Description 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM ER to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 10 91 100 79 IP address for the adapter 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 08 Subnet Cfg 1 255 255 248 0 Subnet mask for the adapter 11 Subnet Cfg 4 23 DPI I O C
55. Peer Fit Action is set to 4 Send Fit Cfg and peer I O communication is disrupted Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Reset Required No Important If the drive uses a 16 bit Reference the most significant word of this value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur 175 AppendixB Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description Details 29 Fit Cfg A1 In Default 0 30 Fit Cfg A2 In Default 0 31 Fit Cfg B1 In Default 0 32 Fit Cfg B2 In Default 0 33 Flt Cfg C1 In Default 0 34 Fit Cfg C2 In Default 0 35 Fit Cfg D1 In Default 0 36 Flt Cfg D2 In Default 0 E Minimum 0 Sets the data that is sent to the Datalink in the ai E i Maximum 4294967295 drive if any of the following is true Type Read Write Parameter 23 Comm Fit Action is setto Reset Required No Send Fit Cfg and I O communication is sald dae Important If the drive uses 16 bit Parameter 24 Idle Fit Action is set to 4 Datalinks the most significant word of Send Fit Cfg and the controller is idle this value must be set to zero 0 or a Parameter 43 Peer Flt Action is set to 4 fault will occur Send Fit Cfg and peer I O communication is disrupted 37 M S Input Default xxxO 0001 Sets the Master Slave input data This data is Bit Values 0 1 0 disabled produced by the scanner and consumed by the 1 0 enabled adapter Type Read W
56. PowerFlex 7 Class drives and their connected peripherals Hold Last When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond by holding last Hold last results in the drive receiving the last data received via the network connection before the disruption If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will continue to run at the same Reference Idle Action An idle action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when the controller is switched out of run mode T O Data I O data sometimes called implicit messages or input output is time critical data such as a Logic Command and Reference The terms input and output are defined from the controller s point of view Output is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter Input is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 225 Glossary 226 IP Addresses A unique IP address identifies each node on an EtherNet IP network An IP address consists of 32 bits that are divided into four segments of one byte each It appears as four decimal integers separated by periods xxx xxx xxx xxx Each xxx can have a decimal value from 0 to 255 For example an IP address could be 192 168 0 1 An IP address has two parts a network ID and a host ID The class of network determines the forma
57. Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Figure 12 Example MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 81 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with qo 20 COMM ER Adapter Hn Hu E o Ethernet Switch A Computer with gt j Ethernet Connection TIP Information for PowerFlex 750 Series drives has been added where applicable Configuring Parameters for Network 1 0 Because the I O for the drive is message based there is no need to configure any I O inside the RSLogix 500 project version 7 00 or later until using the I O as described in Chapter 5 However to get the adapter to operate with the I O created in Chapter 5 we need to configure the adapter to accept the I O and drive to point to the appropriate Datalinks 1 For this example the following adapter I O parameters are set to the following values Adapter Parameter No Setting 25 DPI I O Cfg xxx xxxx xxx1 1111 37 M S Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 38 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 or power cycle the drive For the drive speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup pa
58. Setting the Data Rate 34 By default the adapter is set to autodetect so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting the value of Parameter 16 EN P1 Rate Config determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that the adapter will use to communicate For definitions of data rate and duplex see Glossary on page 221 1 Set the value of Parameter 16 EN P1 Rate Config to the data rate at which your network is operating Port 5 Device Value Data Rate 20 COMM ER 0 Autodetect default Parameter 16 1 10 Mbps Full EN P1 Rate Config 2 10 Mbps Half Autodatect 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half TIP Auto detection of baud rate and duplex works properly only if the device usually a switch on the other end of the cable is also set to automatically detect the baud rate duplex If one device has the baud rate duplex hard coded the other device must be hard coded to the same settings 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 By default the adapter is set to autodetect so it automatically detects the data rate and duplex setting used on the network If you need to set a specific data rate and duplex setting the value of Parameter 18 EN P2 Rate Config determines the Ethernet data rate and duplex setting that the adapter will use to communicate For definitions of data rate and duplex
59. Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Sets the subnet mask bytes for the adapter s network address when Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled 255 255 255 255 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 Subnet Cfg 4 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 Sets the gateway address bytes for the adapter s network address when Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled 255 255 255 255 Gateway Cfg Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 3 Gateway Cfg 4 EN P1 Rate Cfg Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at which the adapter communicates Updates Parameter 17 EN P1 Rate Act after a reset Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Details Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required OGOGO 255 Read Write Yes eOoodococ 255 Read Write Yes OGOGO 255 Read Write Yes 0 Autodetect 0 Autodetect 1 10 Mbps Full 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Read Write Yes Adapter Parameters Appendix B Parameter No Name and Description Details 17 EN P1 Rate Act Default 0 No Link Displays the actual speed and duplex
60. Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address The Gateway Address configuration setting of the network This setting must match the setting of other devices on the network for example 10 91 100 1 Enable BootP When this box is checked BOOTP is enabled in the adapter and will ignore the IP address set in the General tab When unchecked the controller uses the set IP address This is another method to enable disable BOOTP in the adapter For this example leave this box unchecked 12 Click Set to save the Port Configuration information which sets the corresponding offline Subnet Cfg x and Gateway Cfg x parameters in the adapter 13 Click OK on the New Module screen The new node My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My EtherNet IP Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 9 Note that all tag names are defined and Datalinks include the assigned drive parameter name After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic 56 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the
61. Switches Network devices that provide virtual connections that help to control collisions and reduce traffic on the network They are able to reduce network congestion by transmitting packets to an individual port only if they are destined for the connected device In a control application in which real time data access is critical network switches may be required in place of hubs Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Glossary T TCP Transmission Control Protocol EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer Explicit Messaging packets using IP TCP guarantees delivery of data through the use of retries U UDP User Datagram Protocol EtherNet IP uses this protocol to transfer I O packets using IP UDP provides a simple but fast capability to send I O messaging packets between devices This protocol verifies that adapters transmit the most recent data because it does not use acknowledgements or retries UDDT User Defined Data Type A structure data type that you define during the development of an application for example to convert 32 bit REAL parameter data for written and read values to correctly display them in human readable format Update The process of updating firmware in a device The adapter and its connected PowerFlex 7 Class host drive and its peripherals can be updated using various Allen Bradley software tools See Updating the Adapter Firmware on page 44 for more information Z
62. ZeroData When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and drive can respond with zero data Zero data results in the drive receiving zero as values for Logic Command Reference and Datalink data If the drive was running and using the Reference from the adapter it will stay running but at zero Reference Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 229 Glossary 230 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 A adapter applying power 24 commissioning 26 compatible products 13 components 11 configuration tools 27 connecting to the drive 20 connecting to the network 23 definition 221 features 12 firmware updating 44 grounding 22 hardware address label 29 installation 17 26 IP address 29 32 mounting on the drive 22 parameters 171 179 resetting 43 specifications 169 using in a DPI External Comms Kit 167 viewing its status 44 web pages 153 applying power to the adapter 24 Assembly object 183 attentions 15 baud rate see data rate bit definitions of Logic Command Status word for PowerFlex 70 700 700H drives 215 PowerFlex 700S drives 217 BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol definition 221 disabling 32 free server application 221 using 29 BOOTP parameter 171 bridge 221 C cable Ethernet 23 cables DPI Internal Interface 20 21 CIP Common Industrial Protocol 221 classes of IP addresses 226 Index Comm Flt Action parameter 174 com
63. and write many types of DPI messages To use Emulated Block Transfer messages you send a Write message to N40 0 N40 63 wait until the adapter responds with a reply message and then read the response data in N40 0 N40 63 with a Read message For details about Block Transfer messages and the data required for each byte in the N File see the Remote 1 0 Adapter User Manual publication 20COMM UM004 Bits 15 8 are the Most Significant Byte Bits 7 0 are the Least Significant Byte Write Read Bits 15 0 15 0 N40 0 0x00 Length in Bytes 0x00 Length in Bytes N40 1 DPI Port 0x81 Status Size Status Type N40 2 0x00 CIP Service Data N40 3 CIP Class length varies based on message N40 4 CIP Instance N40 5 CIP Attribute 40 6 Data length varies based on message N40 63 M1 This N file lets you read and write control 1 0 messages You can write control 1 0 messages only when all ofthe following conditions are true The adapter is not receiving 1 0 from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner The adapter is not receiving peer 1 0 from another adapter The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C N File Description
64. by network configuration tools to describe products so that you can easily commission them on a network EDS files describe a product device type and revision EDS files for many Allen Bradley products can be found at http www ab com networks eds EtherNet IP Network EtherNet IP Industrial Protocol is an open producer consumer communication network based on the Ethernet standard IEEE 802 3 TCP IP UDP IP and CIP Designed for industrial communication both I O and explicit messages can be transmitted over the network Each device is assigned a unique IP address and transmits data on the network The number of devices that an EtherNet IP network can support depends on the class of IP address For example a network with a Class C IP address can have 254 nodes General information about EtherNet IP and the EtherNet IP specification are maintained by the Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association ODVA ODVA is online at http www odva org Explicit Messaging Explicit Messages are used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates They are typically used to configure monitor and diagnose devices over the network Fault Action A fault action determines how the adapter and connected drive act when a communication fault for example a disconnected cable occurs or when the controller is switched out of run mode The former uses a communication fault action and the latter uses an idle fault action Fault Configurati
65. cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action Access to any PowerFlex drive or SMC and its connected peripherals on the network to which the adapter is connected Device Level Ring DLR or Star Topology support with Quality of Service QoS support 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Compatible Products Required Equipment Getting Started Chapter 1 At the time of publication the adapter is compatible with the following products PowerFlex 70 70EC drives e PowerFlex 700L drives e PowerFlex 700 700VC drives e PowerFlex Digital DC drives e PowerFlex 700H drives DPI External Comms Kit e PowerFlex 700S drives e SMC 50 e PowerFlex 7000 7000 2 drives SMC Flex Note The adapter is not compatible with PowerFlex 750 series drives Some of the equipment that is required for use with the adapter is shipped with the adapter but some you must supply yourself Equipment Shipped with the Adapter When you unpack the adapter verify that the package includes the following Q One20 COMM ER EtherNet IP adapter Q One 2 54 cm 1 in long and one 15 24 cm 6 in long Internal Interface cable only one cable is needed to connect the adapter to the drive for which cable to use see Figure 3 on page 2 21 C One PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM IN004 C One LED Identific
66. display the rung editor Enter BST XIC MGxx n DN NXB XIC MGxx n ER BND OTU MGxx n EN where xx and n must correspond to the assigned data file number and element for example MG12 0 for the message created in steps 1 4 N WD V A Important The information must be entered with appropriate numbers for xx and n for your application and with spaces and forward slashes exactly as shown 8 Press Enter 9 In the MSG instruction Figure 17 double click Setup Screen to launch the message configuration screen Figure 18 Figure 17 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In MSG Read Write Message CEND MSG File MG12 0 CDN I ER 5 Steps 5 8 SM Parent MG12 0 MG12 0 JL CU E LHA DN EN MG12 0 3J E DG ER 10 Configure the General tab fields by entering or verifying the information shown in the message configuration screen Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 75 Chapter 4 76 Configuring the 1 0 General Tab Box This Controller data for Figure 18 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In za MSG Rung 2 4 MG12 0 ultiHop This Controller Control Bits Channel 7 Integral Ignore if timed gH T0 0 Communication Command 500CPU write Break Connection BK fo Data Table Address N20
67. does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication i ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists If Explicit Messages are ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in programmed to write parameter data to Nonvolatile Storage NVS frequently the NVS will quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Do not create a program that frequently uses Explicit Messages to write parameter data to NVS Datalinks do not write to NVS and should be used for frequently changed parameters See Chapter 5 for information about the I O Image using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 105 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging About Explicit Messaging Performing Explicit Messages Explicit Messaging is used to transfer data that does not require continuous updates With Explicit Messaging you can configure and monitor a slave device s parameters on the network Important When an explicit message is performed by default no connection is made since it is an unconnected message When timing of the message transaction is important you can create a dedicated message connection between the controller and drive by checking the Connected box on the Communications tab message configuration screen during message setup These
68. from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of an SMC 50 controller the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to 10 will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the 10 setting 4 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 4 5 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging 134 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Set Attribute Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 67 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive paramet
69. left pane 3 In the treeview right click the I O Configuration folder and choose New Module The Select Module screen appears 4 Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules Wii Select Module Description Vendor 1756 DHRIO C 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DHRIO D 1756 DH Bridge RIO Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 DNB 1756 DeviceNet Scanner Allen Bradley 1756 EN2T A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley 1756 ENET A 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 ENET B 1756 Ethernet Communication Interface Allen Bradley 1756 EWEB A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services Allen Bradley 1756 SYNCH A SynchLink Interface Allen Bradley Controllers 3 Digital Drives Motion Let Find Add Favorite By Category By Vendor J Favorites Cancel Help 5 In the list select the EtherNet IP bridge used by your controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 49 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 6 7 8 In this example we use a 1756 ENBT EtherNet IP Bridge Series A so the 1756 ENBT A option is selected Click OK In the Select Major Revision pop up dialog box select the major revision of its firmware Click OK The bridge s New Module screen appears New Module
70. limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 135 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 69 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters MSG Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG17 0 DN 5 Setup Screen CER MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 70 Custom Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens MSG MG17 0 1 Elements 3 Send Data Receive Data l Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop To Address Type To Address m amd his MicroLogis EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 MSG MG17 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data r This Controller p Control Bits Ignore if timed out TO Channel 1 Integral Break Connection BK Communication Command CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive N60 0 Send 70 0 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Bytes Receive 30 Send o ui rror ER r Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 33 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MultiHop Extended Routing Info File RIX Error Senice alan Sevice Code en Eror Codet 0 Class hex dec 147 Instance hex D deck o Attribute
71. memory for storage of instructions to implement specific functions such as I O control logic timing counting report generation communication arithmetic and data file manipulation A controller consists ofa central processor input output interface and memory See also Scanner Data Rate The speed at which data is transferred on the EtherNet IP network You can set the adapter to a data rate of 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex or 100 Mbps Half Duplex If another device on the network sets or auto negotiates the data rate you can set the adapter to automatically detect the data rate Datalinks A Datalink is a type of pointer used by PowerFlex 7 Class drives and SMC controllers to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow specified parameters to be read or written to without using explicit messages When enabled each Datalink consumes either four bytes or eight bytes in both the input and output image table of the controller The drive determines the size of Datalinks Device Level Ring DLR A protocol that allows multiported EtherNet device to be connected in a ring topology enabling broken ring connection detection and network reconfirmation to linear topology DLR Announce Frame Data frame sent by the ring supervisor in a ring network to announce transition from linear to ring or ring to linear configuration DLR Beacon Frame Data frame sent by the ring supervisor in a ri
72. numbering Figure 41 Example Scattered Read Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name amp Value Data Type Scattered_Read_Request INT 15 Scattered_Read_Request 0 1 INT Scattered_Read_Request 1 0 INT Scaltered Read Riequest 2 0 INT Scattered Read Request 3 3 INT Scattered Read Request 4 o INT Scattered Read Request 5 o INT Scattered Read Riequest 5 6 INT Scattered Read Request 7 0 INT Scattered Read Request 8 0 INT _ Scattered Read Request 3 12 INT _ Scattered_Read_Request 10 0 INT Scattered Read Request 11 0 INT Scattered Read Request 12 17 INT Scalttered Read Request 13 0 INT Scattered Read Request 14 0 INT Description Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad word Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 decimal decimal decimal decimal decimal Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Response Data The Scattered Read Request message reads the multiple parameters and returns their values to the destination tag Scattered Read Response Figure 42 or Figure shows the parameter values Figure 42 Example Scattered Read Response Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name amp Vaue _ Scattered
73. or disable web pages for an adapter see Setting Web Access Control on page 42 ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter contains A electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 52 Important A new switch setting is recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or the adapter is reset If you change a switch setting cycle power or reset the adapter to apply the change Set the Web Pages Switch SW4 in Figure 2 to enable or disable the adapter web pages By default the adapter web pages are disabled For complete details on adapter web pages see Viewing the Adapter Web Pages on page 153 Figure 2 Setting Web Pages Switch only Series B Adapter Web Pages Switch Up Position Disable 8j Down Position Enable Setting Description Down OFF position Web server enabled Up ON position Web server disabled as shipped Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 19 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter the Drive or SMC may contain high voltages that can cause injury or death Remove ALL Connecting the Adapter to i ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive or SMC 20 powe
74. parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 18 Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 35 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Read Message KCDN FCER2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later Figure 36 Parameter Read Single Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive Message Configuration Single_Read_Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Message Configuration Single Read Message Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type cie Generic Service Type Service Code Instance 3 Parameter Read El Hex Class ff Hex Attribute 1 Hex Destination Dutput Current New Tag z The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to co
75. peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 133 3 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 4 When the parameter being written to is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Write Single Request Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 59 to store the request value 10 0 sec that was written to drive parameter 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 59 Example Write Single Request Data File i Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal E Symbol Columns 10 v Desc wo H Properties Usage Help Figure 60 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 129 Chapter 6 130 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 60 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Writes Dest Length 2 N51 0 1234 lt N50 0 o lt N51 2 N50 0 N50 0 For 16 bit Integer P
76. the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Parameter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then View Device Select Event Queue option 5 Press the or GD key to scroll through events The most recent event is Event 1 Clearing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 28 Event Q E3 2 Press the or amp key to scroll to Diagnostics Ping Time Fit 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Events option and then the Clear Event option or Clr Event Queue option A message will pop up to confirm that you want to clear the message or queue 5 Press the Enter key to confirm your request If Clr Event Queue was selected all event queue entries will then display No Event Dgn Events View Event Queue Clear Event Clr Event Queue Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 149 Chapter 7 150 Table 25 Adapter Events Troubleshooting Events Many events in the event queue occur under normal operation If you encounter unexpected communications problems the events may help you or Allen Bradley personnel troubleshoot the problem The following events may appear in the event queue
77. the 1 0 the treeview under the I O Configuration folder and drive profile should be gone TIP If the yellow warning symbol for your drive remains displayed first try power cycling the drive Otherwise double click the drive under the I 0 tree and click the Connection tab to find the cause of the problem 6 The Module Properties Drive Tab screen re appears General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive E OX io Dwe MEN o amp Bl My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive pomm et tap My Fowerl X eU EL Bj 0 PowerFlex 7D EC My PowerFlex 70 Diagrams 8 Parameter List PowerFlex 70 EC 8 Diagnostic Item List Blg 1 20 HIM x SER B 480V 2 1A 8 Device Parameters IE Diagnostic Item List m f 5 20 COMM ER ke 18 Device Parameters S m A Diagnostic tem List AT Revision 2 003 Faulted i Status Running You can view the drive s Parameter List Diagnostic Items List and lists for any connected peripheral including the 20 COMM ER While connected to the drive you can dynamically change values of parameters Diagnostic items and diagram views can be used for troubleshooting Table 24 on page 147 provides diagnostic items for troubleshooting the adapter 7 Click OK when finished to close the Module Properties screen for the drive Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 13 00 15 00 When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile all versions the
78. to a data link e g data link not supported or already in use 21 DPI DL Time No Datalink status message is received on DPI for longer than the maximum time allowed 22 DPI Ctrl Disable The peripheral has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the host 23 DPI Ctrl Enable The peripheral has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the host 24 DPI Msg Timeout A Client Server message sent by the peripheral has not completed within one second 25 DPI Manual Reset Manual reset via DPI triggered 31 Net Dup Address IP address conflict 32 Net Comm Fault The peripheral detected a communications fault on the network 33 et Sent Reset The peripheral received a reset from the network 34 Net IO Close An l O connection from the network to the peripheral was closed 35 Net Idle Fault The peripheral is receiving Idle packets from the network 36 et 10 Open An 1 0 connection to the peripheral from the network has been opened 37 Net IO Timeout An 1 0 connection from the network to the Peripheral has timed out 38 Net IO Size Err EtherNet I P 1 0 connection size mismatch error 39 PCCC IO Close The device sending PCCC Control messages to the Peripheral has set the PCCC Control Timeout to a value of zero Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Table 25 Adapter Events Continued Code Event Description 40 PCCC IO Open The Periphera
79. to scanner read only 6 Datalink A output data from scanner to device read write 7 Datalink B input data from device to scanner read only 8 Datalink B output data from scanner to device read write 9 Datalink C input data from device to scanner read only 10 Datalink C output data from scanner to device read write 11 Datalink D input data from device to scanner read only 12 Datalink D output data from scanner to device read write 13 Logic Status and Feedback Data read only 14 Mask read write 15 Logic Status read only 16 Logic Command read write 17 Feedback read only 18 Reference read write 1 The mask command word is set to the value of the first word of the data where there are ones in the second word of the data Command word 1 and not word 2 or word 1 and word 2 This only controls specified bits in the Logic Command data to the DPI product and does not change the Reference value 184 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Parameter Object Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name DataType Description 100 Control timeout in seconds Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Bad Flag BOOL If set to 1 then attribute 4 may contain invalid data 0 good 1 bad 2 Get Direction BOOL Direction of data transfer 0 Producer Register drive to network 1 Cons
80. used by PowerFlex drives and SMCs to transfer data to and from the controller Datalinks allow a device parameter value to be read or written without using an Explicit Message When enabled each Datalink occupies two 16 bit or 32 bit words in both the input and output image Use adapter Parameter 21 Datalink Size to determine whether the drive uses 16 bit or 32 bit words for Datalinks Rules for Using Datalinks Each set of Datalink parameters in a device can be used by only one adapter If more than one adapter is connected to a single device multiple adapters cannot use the same Datalink Parameter settings in the device determine the data passed through the Datalink mechanism See the documentation for your device When you use a Datalink to change a value the value is NOT written to the Nonvolatile Storage NVS The value is stored in volatile memory and lost when the device loses power Therefore use Datalinks when you need to change a value of a parameter frequently Using 16 Bit Datalinks to Read Write 32 Bit Parameters This subsection only pertains to the SMC Flex and PowerFlex 70 SC or EC PowerFlex 700 SC and PowerFlex 700H drives which use 16 bit Datalinks To read or write a 32 bit parameter using 16 bit Datalinks typically both Datalinks ofa pair A B C D are set to the same 32 bit parameter For example to read parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time in a PowerFlex 70 drive both Datalink Al Out Parameter 3
81. v v vv 12 10 00111 00111 00111 v v vvv 16 14 0 1111 01111 01114 v v Y Viv 20 18 1 1111 1 1111 11111 Table 4 Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase Il control PowerFlex 753 drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control PowerFlex 755 drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings ia Men ale le Size in Words Par 23 Par 35 Par 36 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 6 4 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 10 8 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 14 12 00111 00111 00111 v v vv wv 18 16 01111 01111 01114 v v vv wv 22 20 1 1111 1 1111 d 1111 TIP For instructions on configuring the 1 0 for the adapter using Parameter 25 DPI 1 0 Cfg and its Master Slave Hierarchy using Parameters 37 M S Input and 38 M S Output see Setting the 1 0 Configuration on page 35 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 When using Datalinks up to 8 Data In xx parameters and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters must be assigned to point to the appropriate device parameters for your application 7 After setting the information in the device s New Module screen click OK The Module Properties screen appears 8 Click the Connection tab lil Module Properties My EtherNet IP Bridge ETHERNET MODULE 1 1 Gen
82. which can be obtained by reading the DPI Extended Descriptor attribute for this parameter 31 Always Upload Download Parameter shall always be included in uploads and downloads 202 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Extended Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Indirect Mode 0 Analog selects entire parameters 1 Digital selects individual bits within parameters 1 Indirect Type 0 Analog input list Instance OxFFFF 2 Indirect Type 1 Digital input list Instance OxFFFE 3 Indirect Type 2 Feedback list Instance OxFFFD 4 Indirect Type 3 Analog output list Instance OxFFFC 5 Indirect Type 4 Digital output list Instance OxFFFB 6 Indirect Type 5 Undefined Instance OxFFFA 7 Indirect Type 6 Undefined Instance OxFFF9 8 Indirect Type 7 Undefined Instance OxFFF8 9 Indirect Type 8 Undefined Instance OxFFF7 10 Indirect Type 9 Undefined Instance OxFFF6 11 Indirect Type 10 Undefined Instance OxFFF5 12 Indirect Type 11 Undefined Instance OxFFF4 13 Indirect Type 12 Undefined Instance OxFFF3 14 Indirect Type 13 Undefined Instance OxFFF2 15 Indirect Type 14 Parameter specific list 16 FP Max Decimals Bit 0 These four bits are used on REAL parameters only They indicate the maximum number of decimal places to 17 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 be displayed for small values A
83. 0 no link STRING 16 Diagnostic name text 208 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Set Value Various Diagnostic item value 2 Get International Diagnostic Item Text STRUCT of STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 3 Get International Full Read All STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Value CONTAINER Minimum CONTAINER Maximum CONTAINER Default WORD Pad Word WORD Pad Word WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset DWORD Pad BOOL 32 Extended descriptor STRINGN Diagnostic name text STRINGN Diagnostic units text 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page 204 DPI Time Object Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x9B 155 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of timers in the device Instance 1 is always reserved for a real ti
84. 0 1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service 45 eue edes ada eh 130 Chapter 7 Understanding the Status Indicators voies sex Tee PUR vEwurwina 143 Port Status Indicator ches oe ta duet acte iN aecenas a 144 Network Status Indicatots 4255 trao Ee ee tix E Is 145 Link LS1 LS2 Status Indicator v sone nex du dE E RSERCN 145 NET A Status Indicator us e ebrii ek LIEU ATE 145 Hardware Reset via Node Switches 0cccceeeecucececees 146 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 000 cece eee ee eee 146 Viewing and Clearing Events ocak cosmswgan inv eH ER Ur aen name 149 Chapter 8 Accessing the Adapter Web Home Page 00 cece eee eee 153 Viewing the Web Pagesu cs sn sonoyawsinens kaso nter tes ee tera d 153 Title Bar on Adapter Web Pages oed ee ton Ra e tet 154 Navigation Pane on Adapter Web Pages 0 0 000 eee 155 Process Display Home Page a ha ates veteris ete a Eee per vi evates 156 Browse DPI Device Folder 0 ccc ccc cucececcncncceceevece 156 Diagnostics Web Page s c iss vores ere EE tq Poe rino t ie RR Eg 157 Diagnostic Overview lile use Ere pedea e x Re nena 157 Network Setting Link nicas te REOR MESE orb mI Res puni 158 EtherNet IP Statistics Link 521a ssh se eens bens cued 159 Ring Statistics linke iustus an ae x Pi Ue E sass 159 Crash Display Linke aan cat iocur rere idu estote td pan 160 Heap Statistics Display link 32 22 2253 Lie tern 160 Administrative We
85. 013 Preface Notes 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P June 2013 Components Chapter 1 Getting Started The adapter is intended for installation in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive or Bulletin 150 SMC soft starter and is used for network communication Topic Page Components 11 Features 12 Compatible Products 13 Required Equipment 13 Safety Precautions 15 Quick Start 16 Item Part Description 1 Status Indicators Four status indicators that indicate the status of the DPI the adapter and network connection See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting DPI Connector A 20 pin single row shrouded male header An Internal Interface cable is connected to this connector and a connector on the drive e Ethernet Connector RJ 45 connector for the Ethernet network cable The connector is CAT 5 compliant to ensure reliable data transfer on 100Base TX Ethernet connections Web Pages Switch Enables or disables the adapter web pages See Setting the Web SW4 Pages Switch on page 19 Address mode Set IP address or DHCP BootP mode switches Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 11 Chapter 1 Getting Started Fe atures The features of the adapter include the following Typical mounting in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive or SMC soft starter Captive screws to secure and ground the adapter to the drive Compatibility with various config
86. 0x93 Table 20 Example Controller Tags to Read Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Read Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Read Message BOOL MSG Scattered Read Message MESSAGE Figure 39 Example Ladder Logic to Read Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Read Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Scattered Read Message CDN CERO Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read Multiple Parameters RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Figure 40 Scattered Read Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication Tag Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance 0 Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Read_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Scattered Read Message Message Configuration Scattered Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive CIP Generic z Source Element Scattered_Read_Rec v Custom Source Length Bytes 30 Scallered Read Re New Tag 4b Hex Class Destination Attribute Enable Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text Enable Waiting Extended Eror Code Start Done Done Length 0
87. 10 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 are set to 10 Datalink A1 Out will contain the least significant word LSW and Datalink A2 Out will contain the most significant word MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Example Ladder Logic Program Information Usingthel O Chapter 5 32 bit data is stored in binary as follows MSW 2 through 2 6 LSW 215 through 2 In this example the parameter 10 Elapsed Run Time value of 6553 9 Hrs is read as 6553 9 in Datalink Al Out Parameter 310 and Datalink A2 Out Parameter 311 Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A1 Out LSW 10 0003 A2 Out MSW 10 0001 Conversion Example Parameter 010 Elapsed Run Time 6553 9 Hrs MSW 0001hex 0001 pinary 2 5 65536 LSW 0003hex 3 Engineering Value 65536 3 65539 Parameter 10 Displayed Value 6553 9 Hrs Regardless of the Datalink combination Datalink x1 Out will always contain the LSW and Datalink x2 Out will always contain the MSW In the following example the PowerFlex 70 drive parameter 242 Power Up Marker contains a value of 88 4541 hours Datalink Word Parameter Data Hex A2 Out MSW 242 000D B1 Out LSW 242 7F3D Conversion Example Parameter 242 Power Up Marker 88 4541 hours MSW 000Dhex 1101 binary 2 275 215 851968 LSW 7F3Dhex 32573 Engineering Value 851968 32573 884541 Parameter 242 Displayed Value 88 4541 Hrs
88. 1756 ENBT A 1756 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media Allen Bradley Local My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge pre ADS Nar p amp qpAddess 10 S1 100 80 7 Host Name Revision Electronic Keying Compatible Keying Open Module Properties Cancel Hel Edit the following Box Setting Name A name to identify the EtherNet IP bridge Description Optional description of the EtherNet IP bridge IP Address The IP address of the EtherNet IP bridge Host Name Not used Slot The slot of the EtherNet IP bridge in the rack Revision The minor revision of the firmware in the bridge You already set the major revision by selecting the bridge series in step 5 Electronic Compatible Keying The Compatible Keying setting for Electronic Keying Keying ensures the physical module is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this screen See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Disable keying is recommended Open When this box is checked clicking OK opens additional module properties Module screens to further configure the bridge When unchecked clicking OK closes Properties the bridge s New Module screen For this example uncheck this box 10 Cl
89. 2 e aae eer ect REUS 44 Chapter 4 Using RSLinx Classic Software lt 5 5242 kext sends sur dy ES CRNTVNeES 47 ControlLogix Controller Example o ce tete ees 48 Adding the Bridge to the I O Configuration suus 49 Using RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later 51 Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 13 00 15 00 60 Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions 62 Limitations Using a MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller 68 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example sssee 68 Configuring Parameters for Network I O ssseeue 69 Creating RSLogix 500 Project Version 7 00 or Later 70 Chapter 5 About I O Messaging eyes ulus et II BER Betis etu vis uta 79 Understanding the I O Image 2 ur EG e here Hee 80 ControlLogix Controller Image ue e oeecbr err rete tems 80 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Image sss 82 Using Logic Command Status veo aversos ie Se ox Persi ede ded 84 Using Retetence Pesdbackosesest dus ubere teda tte e P i ES aane 84 PowerFlex 7 Class Drives esee 85 Using Datalink codec ovas hobielucet vnd Pe swale pine ata 86 Rules for Using Dataliikec lt isposs renee seas sad shags RERNEIEES 86 Using 16 Bit Datalinks to Read Write 32 Bit Parameters 86 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 0 0005 87 Functions of the Example Programs 00
90. 20 Awaiting Execution EW 0 Size in Elements 19 Error ER p Message done DN o Message Transmitting ST p Message Enabled EN 0 Target Device Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N41 0 Local Remote Local MultiHop Routing Information File RI9 2 3 MSG Rung 42 4 MG12 0 DER General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 Setting MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Because the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write data to the drive Data Table Address N20 20 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be written to the drive Size in Elements 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address 9 N41 0 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 2 An unused routing informa
91. 2013 Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages This chapter provides instructions on how to monitor the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive by using the adapter s web interface Topic Page 29 Accessing the Adapter Web Home Page 15 Viewing the Web Pages 153 Process Display Home Page 156 Browse DPI Device Folder 156 Diagnostics Web Page 157 Administrative Web Pages 160 Future enhancements may result in adapter web pages that look different than the examples shown in this chapter Accessing the Ad apter Web After configuring the adapter you can view its web pages These pages present Home Page Viewing the Web Pages information about the adapter the device to which it is connected and other DPI devices connected to or installed in the device such as a HIM or I O card The adapter can be configured to automatically send email messages to desired addresses when selected device faults occur and or are cleared when the adapter rakes a communication or idle fault action Bit 0 of Parameter 57 Web Features can be used to protect the configured settings For more details see page 162 The adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action Bit 0 of Parameter 57 Web Features can be used to protect the configured settings For m
92. 22 MCS Input parameter 176 MCS Input parameter configurations 36 M S Output parameter 176 M S Output parameter configurations 36 N NET A status indicator troubleshooting with 145 NET B status indicator locating 144 network cable 23 network IDs 226 Network status indicator troubleshooting with 145 Non Volatile Storage NVS in adapter 27 in drive 86 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 233 Index Nonvolatile Storage NVS definition 227 O objects list of 181 ODVA EtherNet IP specification 224 P Parameter Group object 188 Parameter object 185 parameters accessing 27 convention 7 list of 171 179 numbering scheme 171 restoring to factory default settings 43 PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command 227 PCCC object 190 Peer A Input parameter 177 Peer A Output parameter 179 Peer B Input parameter 177 Peer B Output parameter 179 Peer Cmd Mask parameter 177 Peer Flt Action parameter 177 Peer Inp Addr 1 4 parameters 178 Peer Inp Enable parameter 178 Peer Inp Status parameter 178 Peer Inp Timeout parameter 178 Peer Out Enable parameter 179 Peer Out Skip parameter 179 Peer Out Time parameter 179 Peer to Peer hierarchy configuring adapter to receive data 38 to transmit data 37 definition 227 ping 227 PLC 5 controller limitations when using the I O 68 using the I O 96 PORT status indicator locating 144 troubleshooting with 144 power consumption 169 P
93. 3 Using BOOTP TIP Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 The IP address subnet mask and gateway address can be configured multiple ways depending on the setting of the three rotary switches on the adapter The switches are read on power up or reset 1 Ifthe switches are set to an address from 1 254 that value will be used as the LSB of the IP address 192 168 1 xxx 2 Ifthe switches are set to an invalid number 000 or a value greater than 254 the unit will check if DHCP is enabled If DHCP is enabled the unit requests an address from a DHCP server If DHCP is not enabled and switches are set to an illegal value the adapter will use the IP address along with other TCP configurable parameters stored in nonvolatile memory If the unit finds that the stored IP configuration is not usable set to 0 then the unit will revert to the out of box behavior of DHCP being enabled 3 Any other switch setting will cause the adapter to use the IP address data set in the adapter s database parameters By default the adapter is configured so that you can set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address by usinga BOOTP or a DHCP server There isa variety of BOOTP servers available The following instructions use Rockwell Automation BOOTP Server version 2 3 or later a free standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP utilities with a graphical interface It is available from http www software rockwell com s
94. 34 PowerFlex 700H 0x38 0x39 or 0x3A PowerFlex 700 0x40 PowerFlex 7000 0x48 0x49 or 0x4A PowerFlex 700S 0x5A SMC Flex 0x68 0x69 or 0x6A PowerFlex 700VC 0x90 PowerFlex 753 755 0xA0 20 750 xxx Option Module OxFF HIM 1 Get Family Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device 196 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 2 Set Language Code BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 3 Get Product Series BYTE 1 A 2 B 4 Get Number of Components BYTE Number of components for example main control board 1 0 boards and so forth in the device 5 Set User Definable Text STRING 16 Text identifying the device with a user supplied name 6 Get Status Text STRING 12 Text describing the status of the device 7 Get Configuration Code BYTE Identification of variations 8 Get Configuration Text STRING 16 Text identifying a variation of a family device 9 Get Brand Code WORD 0x0001 Allen Bradley 11 Get NVS Checksum WORD Checksum of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 12 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 13 Get Character Set Code BYTE 0 SCANport HIM 1 150 8859 1 Latin 1 2 ISO 8859 2 Latin 2 3 150 8859 3 Latin 3 4 ISO 8859 4 Lati
95. 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Group Name String SHORT STRING Group name 2 Get Number of Members in Group WORD Number of parameters in group 3 Get 1st Parameter Number in Group WORD 4 Get 2nd Parameter Number in Group WORD 0 n Get WORD m 1 Value varies based on group instance 188 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Device Level Ring Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x0047 7 Services The following common services will be implemented for the DLR Object Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 No Yes Get Attributes All OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single Instances Get Attribute ALL is implemented for instances and Get Attribute Single for both class and instance The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Class Attributes The following class attributes will be supported for the DLR Object AttributelD Access Rule Name DataType Description 1 UNT 2 Instance Attributes A single instance instance 1 will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Network Topology USINT 0 Linear 1 Ring 2 Get Network Status USINT 0 Normal 1 Ring
96. 8 Error Error Code Hex 0 Error Description No errors Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 133 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N50 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 2 4 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX16 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Generic Set Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 9 or 10 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom
97. Adapter Web Pages Notes 166 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Installing the Adapter Chapter 9 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to use the adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE The adapter is typically installed in the internal communication slot on the PowerFlex 7 Class drive However an externally mounted adapter may be desired when The PowerFlex drive is already connected to an existing network such as Remote I O and a second network is desired for a DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software tool data collection and so forth The PowerFlex drive is remotely located next to some I O devices that also need to be networked The DPI External Comms Kit has an option slot for general purpose network I O that a controller can use Both the drive and I O devices are handled as one node on the network to reduce the network node count Topic Page Installing the Adapter 167 The adapter can be installed in a DPI External Comms Kit Figure 96 Mounting and Connecting the Adapter Comms Kit Comms Kit Enclosure Cover Enclosure Base with adapter mounted inside 15 24 cm 6 in Internal Interface Cable connects power supply board For more information see the DPI External Communications Kit Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INOOI Rockwell Automation Publica
98. Attributes Scattered 2 2 0x4C Yes No Set_Attributes_Scattered 2 2 The table below lists the parameters for the Get_Attributes_Scattered and Set Attributes Scattered object specific service Name Data Type Description Parameter Number DWORD Parameter to read or write Parameter Value DWORD Parameter value to read or write zero when reading DPI Fault Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x97 151 Products such as PowerFlex drives use this object for faults Adapters use this object for events Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Instances EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C The number of instances depends on the maximum number of faults or events supported in the queue The maximum number of faults events can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Second Most Recent Drive Fault 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 DPIPort3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Most Rece
99. BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision BYTE 16 Customer Generated Firmware UUID 35 Get NVS CRC DWORD A 32 bit CRC of the Non Volatile Storage in a device 39 Get SI Driver Code WORD Code identifying the protocol between the device and host 128 Get Customization Code WORD Code identifying the customized device 129 Get Customization Revision Number WORD Revision ofthe customized device 130 Get Customization Device Text STRING 32 Text identifying the customized device Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 3 Get Component Name STRING 32 Name of the component 4 Get Component Firmware Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Revision BYTE Minor Revision 8 Get Component Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 9 Get International Component Name STRINGN Name ofthe component with support for Unicode DPI Parameter Object Class Code Hexadecimal _ Decimal 0x93 147 198 To access Host Config parameters use the HOST DPI Parameter Object Class code Ox9F Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the device The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 0 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive
100. Communication Tag My_PowerFlex_Drive Path Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic x Series Set Attribute Single w Source Element Accel Time 1 x ype vm Source Length 2 E Bytes Service E Code 10 Hex Class 93 Hex E Instance 140 Attribute 3 Hex mmm Enable Enable Waiting Stat Done Done Length 0 Eror Code Extended Eror Code Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 123 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Examples 124 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Set Attribute Single This service is used to write a parameter value Service Code l 10 Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 9 9 or A Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Accel_Time_1 9 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 2 6 Num
101. E RU gue Ethernet Switch Event Description You format the required data and set up the ladder logic program to send an Explicit Message request to the scanner or bridge module download The scanner or bridge module transmits the Explicit Message Request to the slave device over the network L2 The slave device transmits the Explicit Message Response back to the scanner The data is stored in the scanner buffer o e The controller retrieves the Explicit Message Response from the scanner s buffer upload The Explicit Message is complete For information on the maximum number of Explicit Messages that can be executed at a time see the documentation for the scanner or bridge and or controller that is being used Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 107 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Examples 108 TIP To display the Message Configuration screen in RSLogix 5000 software add a message instruction MSG create a new tag for the message Properties Base tag type MESSAGE data type controller scope and click the button in the message instruction For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Head a Single Parameter A Parameter Read message is used to read a single
102. EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Figure 44 Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens Configuration Communication Tag Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Message Type Service Type Service Code Instance 0 Message Configuration Scattered Write Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Scattered_Write_Message Message Configuration Scattered_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Path My_PowerFlex_Drive CIP Generic Source Element Custom Scattered_Write_Req i Source Length 30 Bytes 4c Hex Class Destination Scattered_Write_Res v New Tag Attribute Eror Code Start Extended Eror Code Done Done Length 0 Timed Out Eror Path Eror Text ppm The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to write multiple parameters Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4c Hex Code for the requested servic
103. Extended Parameter Reference then 0 The referenced parameter may be read only or writable 1 The referenced parameter must always be writable including while running 23 Disallow Zero This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an Indirect Selector or Extended Parameter Reference then 0 Allow zero 1 Disallow zero If this bit is cleared indicating that a value of zero is allowed the device must support the Zero Text parameter attribute so that a software tool or HIM can obtain text from the Zero Text parameter attribute If this bit is set indicating that a value of zero is disallowed a software tool or HIM will not allow the user to enter a value of zero 24 Datalink Out This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink Out parameter Bit 20 must also be set 25 Datalink In This bit is used by offline tools and indicates that this is a Datalink In parameter Bits 20 and 22 must also be set 26 Not Writable While IO Active This parameter cannot be written if the 1 0 data being exchanged between the Host and the peripheral is valid 27 Command Parameter This parameter commands the drive to take an action such as Reset Defaults or Autotune and then returns toa value of zero Offline software tools will not allow setting this parameter to anything other than a value of zero If an offline file contains a Comma
104. Fault 1 Stop 2 Zero Data 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg Type Read Write Reset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 43 Peer Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if the adapter is unable to communicate with the designated peer By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 177 Appendix B 178 Adapter Parameters Parameter No 48 49 50 Name and Description Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Sets the IP address bytes that specifies the device from which the adapter receives consumes peer I O data 255 255 255 255 Peer Inp Addr 1 Peer Inp Addr 2 Peer Inp Addr 3 Peer Inp Addr 4 Important The Peer Inp Addr must be on the same subnet as the 20 COMM ER See page 226 for more information Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 49 Peer Inp Enable is set to 1 On Peer Inp Timeout Sets the timeout for a peer I O connection If the time is
105. In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Datalink In B1 LSW 7 Datalink Out B1 LSW 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Datalink In B2 LSW 9 Datalink Out B2 LSW 10 Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Datalink In C1 LSW 11 Datalink Out C1 LSW 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 13 Datalink In C2 LSW 13 Datalink Out C2 LSW 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Datalink In D1 LSW 15 Datalink Out D1 LSW 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Datalink In D2 LSW 17 Datalink Out D2 LSW 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 MSW The Logic Command is a 16 bit word of control data produced by the scanner and consumed by the adapter The Logic Status is a 16 bit word of status data produced by the adapter and consumed by the scanner This manual contains the bit definitions for most compatible products available at the time of publication in Appendix D Logic Command Status Words For other products see their documentation The Reference is produced by the controller and consumed by the adapter The Feedback is produced by the adapter and consumed by the controller The size of the Reference Feedback is determined by the drive and displayed using adapter Parameter 20 Ref Fdbk Size Size Valid Values 16 bit 32768 to 32767 32 bit 2147483648 to 2147483647 When the Reference and Feedback are enabled and a ControlLogix controller with a device Add on
106. In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Output Current is a floating point parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 109 Chapter 6 110 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Later A Parameter Write message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 19 Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Write Message BOOL MSG Single Write Message MESSAGE Figure 37 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single Write Message MSG yE lE Message CEN Message Control Single Write Message K DN gt CER2 Important If the explicit message single write must be written continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code
107. M UMO015B EN P July 2013 Request Source Data Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Word 0 c 105 01 2C rno EM EO IE CX E 4 C0 n0 CO o 63 64 65 Response Destination Data Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Chapter Troubleshooting This chapter provides information for diagnosing and troubleshooting potential problems with the adapter and network Topic Page Understanding the Status Indicators 143 Port Status Indicator 144 Network Status Indicator 145 Link LS1 LS2 Status Indicator 145 NET A Status Indicator 145 Hardware Reset via Node Switches 146 Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 146 Viewing and Clearing Events 149 Understanding the Status The adapter has four status indica
108. O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the drive that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a drive parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the drive that go to controller inputs for example data to read a drive parameter TIP When using a drive that has 16 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 and PowerFlex 700H drives to transfer a 32 bit parameter two contiguous drive Datalink parameters for example Data Out A1 A2 B1 B2 etc are required To determine if a parameter is a 32 bit parameter see the Parameter section in the drive documentation and look for a X7 symbol in the No column All parameters in PowerFlex 700 Series B drives are 32 bit parameters For example parameter 3 Output Current in a PowerFlex 70 EC drive is a 32 bit parameter When using a drive that has 32 bit Datalinks PowerFlex 700 VC and PowerFlex 700S only one drive Datalink parameter is required to transfer any parameter Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses Because MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers are 16 bit platforms and are used with the 32 bit 20 COMM ER adapter the data will be transposed from the least significant word LSW to the most significant word MSW in the controller When the I O was configured Chapter 4 an availa
109. OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 23 Chapter 2 Installing the Adapter Applying Power 24 To connect to the second drive attach another Ethernet cable between the first drive s option module ENET2 network port and the second drives option module ENET network port To connect additional drives repeat these daisy chain connections in the same way 5 Route the other end ofthe Ethernet cable through the bottom of the PowerFlex drive Figure 4 and insert its Ethernet cable plug into the mating adapter receptacle ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage injury or death exists A Unpredictable operation may occur if you fail to verify that parameter settings are compatible with your application Verify that settings are compatible with your application before applying power to the drive Install the device cover or close the drive door and apply power to the device The adapter receives its power from the connected device When you apply power to the adapter for the first time its topmost PORT status indicator should be steady green or flashing green after an initialization If it is red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Start Up Status Indications After power has been applied the status indicators for the device and communications adapter can be viewed on the front of the device Figure 7 Possible start up status indications are shown in Table 1 Figure 7 Drive and Adapter Status Indicators location wil
110. OL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Not used 4 Get International Read Full STRUCT of STRINGN International timer text STRUCT Timer value BOOL 16 Timer descriptor 5 Get International Timer Text STRINGN Name of this timer 6 Get Clock Status BOOL 32 Identifies clock status 8 Get Set Number of Leap Seconds INT Identifies the current number of Leap Seconds 9 Get Clock Options B00L 32 Identifies the optional functionality available in the device s System Clock 10 Get Set Clock Options Enable BOOL 32 Identifies which of the clocks options are enabled TCP IP Interface Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF5 245 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 No Yes Set Attribute Single Instances Get Attribute Allis supported for instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 211 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Class Attributes Attribute ID AccessRule Name DataType Description 1 The revision of this object Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Status of TCP IP DWORD Network Interface 2 Get Configuration DWORD 0x000000F4 Capability 3 Get Set Configuratio
111. Parameter 2 Attributes 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 16385 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 0x5C00 OxSFFF 7 23552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF P 24576 25599 DPIPort8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPIPort9 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Instances Hex Dec Device Ox6800 0x6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 Ox6CO0 0x6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 0x7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Example Description 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of parameters in the device 1 Set Write Protect Password WORD 0 Password disabled n Password 2 Set NVS Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Store values in active memory to NVS 2 Load values in NVS to active memory 3 Load default values to active memory 3 Get NVS Parameter Value Checksum WORD Checksum of all pa
112. Profile or Classic Profile is used specific controller tags are automatically created sized 16 bit or 32 bit and placed in the I O image 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 PowerFlex 7 Class Drives The Reference value is an unscaled value it is NOT in Hertz or RPM The Reference uses a 32767 scale The 32767 endpoint of the scale is equal to the value of drive parameter 55 Maximum Freq which has a default value of 130 Hz For all PowerFlex 70 700 drives default scaling is 0 15123 which is equal to 0 60 0 Hz This is based on the formula shown below Reference scaling is limited by drive parameter 82 Maximum Speed If the default value of 60 Hz for parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed the speed Reference scaling also changes To determine Reference scaling use the following formula Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 Scaling Using drive parameter 82 and 55 default values speed Reference scaling is 60 Hz 130 Hz 32767 15123 Therefore 0 15123 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 130 Hz 32767 22685 Therefore 0 22685 0 90 0 Hz A graphic representation of this Reference scaling is shown below 130 Hz 90 Hz 60 Hz 0 Hz 15123 22685 32767 Par 55 Maximum Freq Scaling Parameter 82 Parameter 55 32767 For PowerFlex 70 EC drives fir
113. RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile provides these advantages Profiles for specific drives Figure 10 that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback The controller tags for Datalinks however have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names e Improved I O configuration no I O assembly configuration required Basic control I O is defined but Datalinks still need to be configured mapped 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 The Setup tab includes a DriveExecutive icon link to conveniently launch DriveExecutive software when installed on computer to match the adapter I O configuration with the controller and to assign the Datalink parameters in the drive This reduces I O mismatches TIP Since the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles version 16 00 or later we recommend using RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles to take advantage of its benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make I O configuration errors Figure 10 Classic Profile Screens for Drives Wii Select Module lodule Description Drives 150 SMC Flex E 150 SMC Flex via 20 COMM E 1305 ACDrive EN1 1305 AC Drive via 1203 EN1 1336E IMPACTDrive EN1 1336 IMPACT Drive via 1203 EN1 1336F PLUSIIDrive EN1 1336 PLUS II Drive via 1203
114. RUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page 202 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value WORD Next parameter WORD Previous parameter STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz WORD Multiplier 2 WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 2 BYTE 3 Link source of the value 0 no link BYTE Always zero 0 STRING 16 Parameter name 8 Get DPI Descriptor B00L 32 Descriptor see page 202 9 Get Set DPI Parameter Value Various Parameter value in NVS 10 Get Set DPI RAM Parameter Value Various Parameter value in temporary memory Valid only for DPI drives 11 Get Set DPI Link BYTE 3 Link parameter or function block that is the source ofthe value 0 no link 12 Get Help Object Instance WORD ID for help text for this parameter 13 Get DPI Read Basic STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor see page 202 CONTAINER Parameter value CONTAINER Minimum value CONTAINER Maximum value CONTAINER Default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Units for example Amp Hz 14 Get DPI Parameter Name STRING 16 Parameter name 15 Get DPI Parameter Alias STRING 16 Customer supplied parameter name 16 Get Parameter Processing Error BYTE 0 No error 200 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P July 2013 1 Value is less than the minimum 2 Value is greater than the maximum EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 18
115. Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 121 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Figure 50 Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single Read Message Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag My_PowerFlex_Drive Path Message Configuration Single Read Message Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Service TR Get Attribute Single x Service Code Instance 3 e Hex Class 93 Hex Destination Attribute 9 Hex Dutput Current New Tag Enable Enable Waiting Start Eror Code Extended Eror Code Eror Path Eror Text lee pm The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Get Attribute Single This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code l e Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 4 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as pa
116. SINT Destination User number SLink UINT Source Link ID SLink UINT Source Link ID SSta USINT Source Station number SSta USINT Source Station number SUser USINT Source User number SUser USINT Source User number CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC_ ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 191 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects The adapter supports the following PCCC command types CMD FNC Description 0x06 0x03 Identify host and some status 0x0F 0x67 PLC 5 typed write OxOF 0x68 PLC 5 typed read Ox0F 0x95 Encapsulate other protocol Ox0F OxA2 SLC 500 protected typed read with 3 address fields Ox0F OxAA SLC 500 protected typed write with 3 address fields Ox0F OxA1 SLC 500 protected typed read with 2 address fields Ox0F OxA9 SLC 500 protected typed write with 2 address fields Ox0F 0x00 Word range read OxOF 0x01 Word range write For more information regarding PCCC commands see DF1 Protocol and Command Set Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 N Files N File Description N40 This N file lets you use Emulated Block Transfer messages to read
117. Series Drives PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Feedback PowerFlex Drive Speed Feedback 93 Chapter 5 94 Using the 1 0 Figure 27 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Command Reference Command Stop TT My_PowerFlex_Drive O Data 0 0 z E Command Start zu My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 1 re i Command_Jog JE My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 2 JIE Command_Clear_Faults 3E My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 3 Jj t Command Forward Reverse 3 My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 4 ner Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex Drive O Data 0 5 gt J E Move Example Datalink Data Source Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 1 MOV Speed Reference 0e 0e Copy File Source co Speed_Reference Dest My PowerFlex Drive O Data 2 Length 2 PowerFlex 70 Series Drives PowerFlex 70 Drive Speed Reference PowerFlex Drive Speed Reference The Datalink data used in the example program is shown in Figure 28 Note that to describe the parameters to which the Datalinks are assigned you may want to add descriptions to the automatically created generic controller tags or create a User Defined Data Types UDDT Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Figure 28 ControlLogix Example Datalinks for Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Pr
118. Service Generic Get Attribute Single Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 9 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number Attribute 9 Dec Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive messaging 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 7 of an SMC 50 controller the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number 3 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 2 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 4 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Par
119. Status Word Phase II Control Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 Status Description X Active 0 Not Active 1 Active Running 0 Not Running 1 Running Command 0 Reverse Direction 1 Forward Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward Accel 0 Not Accelerating 1 Accelerating Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating Jogging 0 Not Jogging 1 Jogging Fault 0 No Fault Par 323 324 325 1 Fault Alarm 0 No Alarm Par 326 327 328 1 Alarm Flash Mode 0 Not in Flash Mode 1 In Flash Mode X Run Ready 0 Not Ready to Run Par 156 1 Ready to Run x At Limit 0 Not At Limit Par 304 1 At Limit X Tach Loss Sw 0 Not Tach Loss Sw 1 Tach Loss Sw X At Zero Spd 0 Not At Zero Speed 1 At Zero Speed X At Setpt Spd 0 Not At Setpoint Speed 1 At Setpoint Speed X Enable 0 Not Enabled 1 Enabled 1 See Parameter 304 Limit Status in the PowerFlex 700S drive User Manual for a description of the limit status conditions Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Logic Command Status Words Appendix D SMC Flex Controllers Logic Status Word SMC 50 Controllers Bit Status Description 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Enabled 1 Control Power Applied 0 No Control Power Running 1 Power Applied to Motor 0 Power n
120. Stop Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRislt Start Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt Jog Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt ClearFault Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt Forward Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRslt Reverse Decimal My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 DriveLogicRslt_LocalContrl Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt MOPInc Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt Accelt Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Accel2 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRslt Decel Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt Decel2 Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O DriveLogicRislt SpdReflDO Decimal My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D DriveLogicRslt SpdReflD1 Decimal Save the 1 0 Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer 1 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project 16 Example using 20COMMER to the controller Connected Controller Name v15 Example using 20CO0MMER Type 1756 L63 4 ControlLogix5563 Controller Path Ethernet 10 91 100 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00244880 Security No Protection A DANGER Unexpected hazardous mo
121. T Datalink In D1 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 9 INT Datalink In D2 Name amp Data Type Description My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 AB ETHER My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data INT 20 Dutput Image My PowerFles Drive O Data U INT Logic Command My PowerFlex Drive O Data 1 INT Not Used My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 INT Reference LSW My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 3 INT Reference MSW My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 INT Datalink In A1 LSW My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 INT Datalink In amp 1 MSW My PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 INT Datalink In A2 LSW PowerFlex 700S Seri es Drive My Powerlex DriveD Data 7 INT Datalink In A2 MSW 32 bit Speed Reference and My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 INT Datalink In B1 LSW Datalinks c My PowerFles Drive O Data S INT Datalink In B1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 10 INT Datalink In B2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive D Data 11 INT Datalink In B2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data12 INT Datalink In C1 LSW My PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 13 INT Datalink In C1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 14 INT Datalink In C2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 5 INT Datalink In C2 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 15 INT Datalink In D1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 17 INT Datalink In D1 MSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 18 INT Datalink In D2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive O Data 13 INT Datalink In D2 MSW Program Tags To use the Controller tags that are automatically created you need to cr
122. Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 111 Chapter 6 112 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions A Scattered Read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters Up to 22 parameters can be read This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code
123. To Net 01 most significant DL To Net 02 least significant DL To Net 02 most significant DL To Net 03 least significant DL To Net 03 most significant DL To Net 04 least significant DL To Net 04 most significant DL To Net 05 least significant DL To Net 05 most significant DL To Net 06 least significant DL To Net 06 most significant DL To Net 07 least significant DL To Net 07 most significant DL To Net 08 least significant DL To Net 08 most significant DL To Net 09 least significant DL To Net 09 most significant DL To Net 10 least significant DL To Net 10 most significant DL To Net 11 least significant DL To Net 11 most significant DL To Net 12 least significant DL To Net 12 most significant DL To Net 13 least significant DL To Net 13 most significant DL To Net 14 least significant DL To Net 14 most significant DL To Net 15 least significant DL To Net 15 most significant DL To Net 16 least significant DL To Net 16 most significant If your controller or HMI platform supports CIP messaging use the CIP Parameter object to get and set parameters Description These N files let you read and write parameter values in DPI Port 0 the host PowerFlex drive as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 read two
124. User Manual Allen Bradley Dual Port EtherNet IP Communication Adapter Catalog Number 20 COMM ER 3 at at T T T Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits
125. Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 4 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 5 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 5 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 7 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 8 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 3 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 10 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 11 INT Pad Word Scattered Write Response 12 INT Parameter Number decimal Scattered Write Response 13 INT Pad Word or Error Code Scattered Write Response 14 INT Pad Word ControlLogix Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions The data structures in Figure 47 and Figure 48 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error code parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 119 Chapter 6 120 Using Explicit Messaging Figure 47 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages o e o 40 010 co n50 O lll 4A 05 n5
126. _Read_Response Scattered Read Response 0 Scattered Read Response 1 Scattered_Read_Response 2 Scattered_Read_Response 3 Scattered_Read_Response 4 Scattered_Read_Response 5 Scattered_Read_Response 6 Scattered_Read_Response 7 Scattered_Read_Response 8 Scattered_Read_Response 3 Scattered_Read_Response 10 Scattered_Read_Response 11 Scattered_Read_Response 12 Scattered_Read_Response 13 Scattered Read Response 14 ETSI ER ERI EE E Data Type Description INT 15 INT Parameter Number decimal INT Parameter Value LSW INT Parameter Value MSW INT Parameter Number decimal INT Parameter Value LSW INT Parameter Value MSW INT Parameter Number decimal INT Parameter Value LSW INT Parameter Value MSW INT Parameter Number decimal INT Parameter Value LSW INT Parameter Value MSW INT Parameter Number decimal INT Parameter Value LSW INT Parameter Value MSW In this message example the parameters have the following values PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 1 Output Freq Read Value 32 5 Hz 3 Output Current 0 01 Amp 6 Output Voltage 118 7 VAC 12 DC Bus Voltage 329 2 VDC 17 Analog In2 Value Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 8 318 mA 115 Chapter 6 116 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write Multiple Parameters RSL
127. able Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Speed Feedback LSW N20 3 Speed Feedback MSW N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 660 DPI Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 661 DPI Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 662 DPI Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 663 DPI Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 664 DPI Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 665 DPI Data Out C2 MSW N20 16 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 LSW N20 17 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 666 DPI Data Out D1 MSW N20 18 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 LSW N20 19 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 667 DPI Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Speed Reference LSW N20 22 Speed Reference MSW N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of para
128. ad data from the drive Data Table Address N20 1 An unused controller data table address containing the data to be read from the drive Size in Elements 19 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address N41 0 Specific starting address of the source file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 1 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project see Table 11 Table 14 starting on page 98 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 97 3 For N File details see N Files on page 192 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Create MicroLogix 1100 1400 Ladder Logic for the Logic Command Reference and Datalink In 1 Insert another separate rung 2 Double click on the rung to display the rung editor 3 Enter MSG MGxx n where xx is an unused data file number for example MG12 n and nis an unused element of the data file chosen for xx for example MG12 0 Press Enter Insert another separate rung Double click on the rung to
129. address by using adapter parameters Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Off No power OR No IP Address Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit I O or make a messaging connection to the adapter Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the I O from the peer device An IP address is configured but no CIP Flashing Green connections are established and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out At least one CIP connection any transport class is Steady Green established and an Exclusive Owner connection No Action Required has not timed out Place the scanner in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device that will send I O Check the IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches for correct operation Check the amount of traffic on the network Connection has timed out see the The EtherNet Flashing Red Adaptation of CIP Specification sections 9 4 4 for detailed behavior description Steady Red Duplicate IP Address detected Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged Adapter Failure used in conjunction with PS Replace cables if necessary Orange orange Cycle power to the drive g Verify that Host is a Scanport or Allen Bradley compatibl
130. age About I O Messaging 79 Understanding the I O Image 80 Using Logic Command Status 84 Using Reference Feedback 84 Using Datalinks 86 Example Ladder Logic Program Information 87 ControlLogix Controller Example 88 this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication i ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in On CIP based networks including EtherNet IP I O connections are used to transfer the data which controls the PowerFlex drive or SMC and sets its Reference I O can also be used to transfer data to and from Datalinks The adapter provides many options for configuring and using I O including the following Configuring the size of I O by enabling or disabling the Logic Command Reference and Datalinks Setting a Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter and Chapter 4 Configuring the I O discuss how to configure the adapter and controller on the network for these options The defines the different options This chapter discusses how to use I O after you have configured the adapter and controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 79 Chapterb Using the 0 Understanding the 1
131. ages Service Code 4C Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 In this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered write messages always assume that every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 30 The data structure format is the same as shown on page 120 Maximum length is 66 words 132 bytes which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 3 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 75 t
132. all of the available drives with their communication adapters TIP f the PowerFlex drive is not shown go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate and download the latest RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profile 2 From the list select the drive and its connected adapter For this example we selected PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 Click OK The drive s New Module screen appears 4 On the General tab edit the following data about the drive adapter Box Setting Name A name to identify the drive Description Optional description of the drive adapter IP Address The IP address of the adapter 5 On the New Module screen in the Module Definition section click Change to launch the Module Definition screen and begin the drive adapter configuration process In this example Datalinks are used to do the following Read Write to Output Current Parameter 3 Accel Time 1 Parameter 140 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 12 Decel Time 1 Parameter 142 Fault 1 Code Parameter 243 High Resolution Reference Parameter 308 TIP To get the latest RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profile go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate 52 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 6 In the Module Definition screen edit the following information Box Revision Setting The major and minor revision of the firmware database in the drive If the drive s major an
133. alue of parameter assigned to Parameter 317 Data Out D2 MSW N20 20 Logic Command see Appendix D N20 21 Reserved N20 22 Speed Reference N20 23 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 300 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 301 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 302 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 303 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 304 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 305 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 306 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 307 Data In D2 MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 99 Chapterb Using the 0 Table 13 Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase
134. alue of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 LSW N20 24 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 707 708 Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 709 710 Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 711 712 Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 713 714 Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 715 716 Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 717 718 Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 719 720 Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 721 722 Data In D2 MSW 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using the 1 0 Chapter 5 Table 14 Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 700S Drives with Phase Il Control Data T
135. ameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 131 Chapter 6 132 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Get Attribute Single Hesponse Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 63 to store the response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 63 Example Get Attribute Single Response Data File Data File N40 dec Radix Decimal aa Symbol Columns 10 Desc N40 2 Properties Usage Help Figure 64 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Figure 64 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Gets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S and PowerFlex 750 Series Drives Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Generic Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a
136. ample Rackwell Autossa doves Internet Lxplerer provided by Rackwel i Automation lelxl G k J six rj De C Ves fetes Do tie ermos L4 Ervronmertal Services ML o LEVEL LThefodeel Rio Quilty Environmental an E hood At omatn LESS Pu pest Tus du Aten sradtey 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter Automation Creyrq hh 2010 Aecowt Avtmmaten inv At Regis Pene a Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 155 Chapter8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Process Display Home Page The Process Display pop up window dynamically shows the host drives information To view this window click the Process display link in the navigation pane Figure 81 Example of Process Display Pop up Window EEDZDXNEUTTSES 000 s Ihttp 192 168 1 101 popup html Windows Interne Product Text SMC Flex Standard Status Stopped Commanded Direction Reverse Rotation Direction Forward 0 0 Amps Process Status 0 Volt O MTU Seconds between refresh Disable with 0 Yt Internet fay 100 gt 4 Browse DPI Device Folder This folder gives access to the databases fault and alarm queues and diagnostic 156 data if applicable to all the devices connected to the DPI network Each Device on the DPI network has its own folder that has links to module information parameters diagnostic information fault queues and alarm queue The Parameters are further organi
137. and earlier explicit messaging must be performed using the PCCC N File method For RSLogix 500 software version 7 20 and later the CIP messaging method has been added along with the PCCC N File method However it is recommended to use the CIP method because it is easier to use and understand For this reason only instructions for the CIP method are provided The CIP messaging method provides two ways to perform explicit messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 e Read Write Parameter Service simplifies setup by requiring less data to be entered in message configuration screens However the Read Write Parameter Service can only be used to perform single parameter read or single parameter write explicit messages Multiple parameter reads or writes must be performed using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service described below Important When performing a Write Parameter message the data will always be written to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS Continuous NVS writes may damage the drive s EEPROM If continuous writes are necessary use the Generic Set Attribute Single Service and attribute A 10 decimal see page 133 e Generic Get Set Attribute Service requires more setup data to be entered in message configuration screens but can be used to perform single parameter read or write and multiple parameter read or write explicit messages Also the Gene
138. arameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S Drives MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Generic Get Set Attribute Service MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Generic Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Figure 61 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Read Write Message MSG File Setup Screen MG13 0 lt Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Head a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 62 Generic Get Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This MicroLogi Channel 1 EthetNet IP Device str MSG MG13 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data iis Co
139. arameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 2 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 3 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 4 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 5 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 6 The following N Files are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive N213 0 Ne N2132 N214 0 N215 0 N2152 N216 0 N217 0 N2172 N218 0 N219 0 N2192 N220 0 N221 0 N2212 N222 0 N223 0 N2232 N224 0 N225 0 N225 2 N226 0 N227 0 N227 2 N228 0 249 249 J 249 249 J 249 249 J 249 249 El 249 249 J 249 249 1 249 249 B 249 249 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Parameters 125 249 in t
140. ates TL Ater sadiey PIRE T AT ar we bos ern Tube e ri Heap Statistics Display link Figure 89 Heap Statistics Page zm BOE SPICE lee ixiU ee I 2 ai dee Mi ponat B D ce e ye Tom e anen sraaioy PIRSA T Adapter Automation Blez uetesEs SUDHE ES Beds Betson Robosni E pestis Raton at 3 si aem A LOL heap hem Administrative Web Pages Administrative Web pages give the user access to the 20 COMM ER module for 160 the purpose of configuring the device for network operation and messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 Device Identity Link The Device Identity link is used to give the Adapter an identity on the EtherNet IP network that will be recognized by the user software tools and other devices on the network Figure 90 Device Identity zu zlelx G w fetes mano jscex c be p ieri m Urronnert eric ML c LEVEL 1 The Rodat Auto iE Quity Exwrormenta ard dM Rockad Aatemations O Alen Bradiey 20 COMM ER EtherNet 1P Adapter Network Configuration Link The network configuration link allows setting of the TCP IP layer of the Adapter including IP address Subnet mask and gateway address Figure 91 Network Mini a Page gosk Peto F192 368 1 101 z3 aix o LH gms Rams Sey Tete e Automation Meets here Sa x m tubes Mash SESE MAT Delet Os
141. ath or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 113 Chapter 6 114 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 41 or Figure in the source tag named Scattered_Read_Request to read these five parameter S PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter
142. ation Label for use with Bulletin 150 SMC Flex and Bulletin 700 PowerFlex drives User Supplied Equipment To install and configure the adapter you must supply the following C A small flathead screwdriver Q Ethernet cable for details see the EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 available on the ODVA website at http odva org Home ODVATECHNOLOGIES EtherNetIP EtherNetIPLibrary tabid 76 Default aspx Q Ethernet switch for details see the Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual publication ENET RM002 Q Configuration tool such as the following PowerFlex 20 HIM xx HIM Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 13 Chapter 1 14 Getting Started Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later Connected Components Workbench is the recommended stand alone software tool for use with PowerFlex drives You can obtain a free copy by Internet download at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html Requesting a DVD at http www ab com onecontact controllers micro800 Your local distributor may also have copies of the DVD available Connected Components Workbench software cannot be used to configure SCANport based drives or Bulletin 160 drives DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later This software tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com suppor
143. ations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Figure 73 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters MSG Read Write Message MSG File Setup Screen MG18 0 lt CEN epn Leer S Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate Generic Set service explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 133 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Write Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 74 Custom Scattered Write Multiple Message Configuration Screens MSG MG18 0 1 Elements General Ins Add Hop MSG MG18 0 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop MultiHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Channel 1 Integral To Address Type EthetNet IP Device str Control Bits Communication Command CIP Generic Data Table Address Receive N80 0
144. b Pages cccissvsccch oats ine drew rur RS OE Rd Hed 160 Device Identity Link 252242545 eos nda ete iueeh 161 Network Configuration Link ees okces Testo tecta en 161 Email Configuration Link eue voor tele tnt wee ee eoe 162 Password Configuration cu dicciucgn rover iaas panda y rep GREVEN 165 Chapter 9 Installing the Adapters cuvad si uus eene ae See o p t t tds 167 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P June 2013 Table of Contents Specifications Adapter Parameters EtherNet IP Objects Logic Command Status Words Appendix A Communications ide bM RE EPOR i decade bse ERS 169 P cctticadl usan is deer bon ot Ak EROR UR Ob o cad duree 169 Mecchanicul 5s sos poena sone sesh eR CIA 5565 80 pc cute ier 170 Pasvitontietital is 22 ebdusdee rite roi Qe per TRE PS TerEce dna di urAE 170 Regulatory Compliance iu vedete rand s relates reed d 170 Appendix B About Parameter NIIDOISo eco exse Sed RR E DU Rie bx 171 Parameter List oll eeu EINST AME E ez 171 Appendix C Supported Data Types terreos recan banana OANE E 182 Identity Object bc eh OE eer sed istae det DN UE tuU ae ele tact 182 Assembly Object sas isisi mede PORE Ca RI ed GERE LS S 183 R gister O BICC ass oncmtnan shania aia vio Pur ue estate tember 184 Parameter Object Jc dete aute MUR ERI P EIE Nd 185 Parameter Group Object ss sede mtez Core ene SI Pe UE ED SUE NES 188 Device Level Ring Objects aides Session ni Reda d ad xo pU EREMO 189 Quality of Service O
145. be set to INT When using a PowerFlex 7008 drive Output Current is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when the creating controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL 122 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions A Set Attribute Single message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Table 23 Example Controller Tags to Write a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Write Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Write Message BOOL MSG Single Write Message MESSAGE Figure 51 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter Execute Single Write Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Write Message KCDN3 MER ControlLogix Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Figure 52 Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens Message Configuration Single_Write_Message Configuration Communication Tag Name Single Write Message Message Configuration Single Write Message Configuration
146. ber of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Path 4 Example Value My_PowerFlex_Drive Description The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Name Example Value Single_Write_Message Description The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to write to parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 7 of an SMC 50 controller the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number 3 Setting the Attribute value to 9 will write the parameter value to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage EEPROM memory which retains the parameter value even after the drive is power cycled Important When set to 9 the EEPROM may quickly exceed its life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction Setting the Attribute value to A 10 decimal will write the parameter value to temporary memory which deletes the parameter value after the drive is power cycled When frequent write messages are required we recommend using the A 10 decima
147. bject Sese oekesemes hence nU EC QR mem pinos 190 PECO Object rem 190 DPI Device OBIeGt 3425 eese idee tuor S ded eret e US EAS TS 196 DPT Parameter Object iesiri eienaar pde exta eeu E mhgps 198 plos aa BOD c DN EE 204 DPT Alum Object iesecsete cetur simi oe xS O e UTR RR AU P 206 DPI Diagnostic Object aas E RR ER RE pan Yrs e REPRE 207 DPI Time OQ Dj ct ec E 209 TCP IP Interface Object ua siian a a tree 211 Ethernet Link ODJects cadera roS CH Eee decret eds 213 Appendix D PowerFlex 70 70EC PowerFlex 700 700VC and PowerFlex 700H Drivess t e eeu RC E RI E DN IER 215 Logic Command Word d eeu ee dto eher E Rss ton eade Gb dcn 215 Logic Status W OLG euede Duda ads ec eee wile date d a ad 216 PowerFlex 700S Drives ists nn ea RT CUPS RD PE URS wae mes 217 Logic Command Word Phase II Control 217 Logic Status Word Phase II Control eeeuesse 218 SMC Flex Controllers SMC 50 Controllers 000 cee es 219 Logic Status WOtdesdudasde sete XS Ce RO Ct e CH ERN 219 Logis Command Word Control i aac cca nucw reete ee pt 220 GLOSSY ooo dou coe eL EORUM UC REATUS DECLINE 221 INDEX C es open cu tarts aman eat ol oll e tha d anion 231 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P June 2013 About This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Rockwell Automation Support Preface Topic Page Conventions Used in This Manual T Rockwell Automation Support Fi Additional Reso
148. ble data table address N20 was used Figure 29 shows the entire data file address structure for this example Figure 29 Data File Table for Example Ladder Logic Program 3 Data File N20 dec Radix Decimal s Symbol Columns 10 v Desc N20 Properties Usage Help Important The N20 0 data table address in this example is used to set a control timeout value in seconds which determines how long it will take the adapter to detect a communication loss Enter a valid value 1 32767 for N20 0 A value of zero 0 is not valid because it disables the timeout and all I O connections Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks intended for the drive will not execute A timeout value of 5 20 seconds is recommended Depending on the drive you are using Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 or Table 14 show the I O definitions as they relate to the N20 data table Figure 29 being used in this example When using PowerFlex 70 or 70 EC PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700VC drives or SMC Flex controllers which all contain INT 16 bit format data types you will read from and write to the MSW data table address in the controller When using PowerFlex 700 VC drives or SMC 50 controllers which contain DINT 32 bit format data types you will read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller When using PowerFlex 7008 drives which contain both DINT 32 bit format and REAL floating point
149. ce Default 0 0 0 0 sia a 20 COMM ER IP Addr Cfg 1 Parameter 04 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 3 0 lt gt 255 IP Addr Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 The Network status indicator will be steady green or flashing green if the IP address is correctly configured and is connected to an operating ethernet network Set a Subnet Mask Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP DHCP is set to 0 Disabled 2 Set the value of Parameters 08 Subnet Cfg 1 through 11 Subnet Cfg 4 to the desired value for the subnet mask Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Port 5 Device 2S COMMER Subnet Cfg 1 Parameter 08 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2 Subnet Cfg 3 0 lt gt 255 Subnet Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 Set a Gateway Address Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled 2 Set the value of Parameters 12 Gateway Cfg 1 through 15 Gateway Cfg 4 to the IP address of the gateway device Default 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Port 5 Device 20 COMM ER Gateway Cfg Parameter 12 Gateway Cfg 2 Gateway Cfg 1 Gateway Cfg 3 0 lt gt 255 Gateway Cfg 4 3 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 33 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter
150. ce cece eee 87 Logic Command Status Words ossstrred pd pestes beide titre 88 ControlLogix Controller Example n eL eerte rr rere 88 Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later 0 0 ccccecececcecnceecees 88 Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 1300 15 00 hA EAEE EE ATEUS 89 Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All VELSIONS eana Maeda osha ee oa aaa 90 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example sssee 96 Drive and Adapter Parameter Settihgs cete oed ees 96 Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses 97 Chapter 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P June 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Troubleshooting Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE Table of Contents About Explicit Messaging od aetate ep hien e M eed 106 Performing Explicit Messages seen 106 ControlLogix Controller Examples 45 irae serra reta oa tu 108 Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software Version 15 00 or Latebclcerkee e ia le oer aie QU qui RN Sela s UST I 108 Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions 121 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Examples seses 124 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service lees 125 MicroLogix 110
151. configuration status and traffic information about the EtherNet IP network communications Diagnostic Overview link This link provides a general overview of the Adapter s activity on the EtherNet IP network Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 157 Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 158 Figure 84 Diagnostic Overview Page A BEE OS Cy E T T brerireertd Serves ME m LEVEL the Rachel Ado Quir Erroreari and d LED UE well Aten sradiey 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter Lif 7m g 92999 seconde Boise teresh TE Disable meant et 0 Network Setting Link This link provides information about the adapter s Ethernet settings and network activities Figure 85 Network Setting Page sin BoE OLILLILDIM 9m 77 C2 P3 Je eh tte UK fevrtus ius om reroneent Sereces ML c LEVEL 1 The Rodel Auto Quy Dsronmert arc 1 Enix Monate Cubo ce Pues het Tes gt YE 20 coww tR EtherNet IP Adapter Automation 00110 9C 2 44 78 ava i6 239 239 283 0 Deis Gate 0 020 Autonegotiate Status Forced Speed and Ouste 0000 Sasinai temesn Rebus FE Dassis Ravesh sam o Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 EtherNet IP Statistics Link This links displays information about the traffic activity on the EtherNet IP ne
152. controller mode back to Remote Run In this case choose the appropriate mode for your application If the controller was in Program Mode before clicking Download this prompt will not appear 3 Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears a Navigate to a folder b Type a file name c Click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values Correlate the Drive with the Controller You must now correlate the drive settings to the RSLogix 5000 project I O settings so that they match This requires loading the project I O settings into the drive 1 In the treeview under I O Configuration right click on the drive profile for this example My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive and choose Properties Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 2 Click the Drive tab Wii Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Dive pepe o owen commas Cease Dre Correlation with online drive has not been completed No drive data can be displayed until correlation has completed successfully Click the Connect to Drive button to begin correlation Status Faulted Cancel 3
153. d be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or a controller in idle state ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists When a system is configured for the first time there may be unintended or incorrect machine motion Disconnect the motor from the machine or process during initial system testing ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists The examples in this publication are intended solely for purposes of example There are many variables and requirements with any application Rockwell Automation Inc does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use of the examples shown in this publication Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 15 Chapter 1 Getting Started Quick Start This section is provided to help experienced users quickly start using the adapter If you are unsure how to complete a step refer to the referenced chapter Step Action See 1 Review the safety precautions for the drive or SMC Drive or SMC User Manual 2 Review the safety precautions for the adapter Throughout this manual 3 Verify that the power control device is properly installed Drive or SMC User Manual 4 Install the adapter Powe
154. d minor revision is not available the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct database revision use one of the following buttons at the bottom left of the Module Definition screen Create Database Creates a database from an online network drive Clicking this button displays an RSLinx software RSWho window Browse to the online drive for this example PowerFlex 70 EC select it and click OK The database will be uploaded and stored on the computer Thereafter close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision Web Update When a drive is not available online opens the Allen Bradley Drives Web Updates website to download a specific database file After downloading the file close the Module Definition screen and then re open it to display the new revision Match Drive Use this button when the drive being added to the network matches the drive profile revision rating configuration settings and so forth of an existing online network drive Click this button to conveniently create a duplicate drive profile from the online drive and automatically load this identical information into the Module Definition screen This eliminates the need to manually enter the information each time a new drive with a matching profile is added to the network Electronic Keying Compatible Module The Compatible Module setting for Electronic Keying ensures that the physical module
155. ddr 1 doces 2 ip Peer Inp Addr 2 eer inp naor Peer Inp Addr 3 0 lt gt 255 Default 0 0 0 0 Peerinp Addr 4 3 Set Parameter 40 Peer A Input to select the destination ofthe data that is input to the drive as Peer A Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 40 1 Logic Command Reference Peer A a 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input Cmd Ref Data is used from the least significant word in the event of a mismatch in Reference or Datalink sizes 4 If desired set Parameter 41 Peer B Input to select the destination of the data to input to the device as Peer B Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 41 1 Logic Command Reference Peer B ua 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input DL A Input S If the adapter receives a Logic Command set the bits in Parameter 42 Peer Cmd Mask that the device should use The bit definitions for the Logic Command word will depend on the drive to which the adapter is connected See Appendix D or the device documentation Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Ignore this command bit Default Parameter 42 1 Use this command bit Peer Cmd Mask 000000000000000 Bit 0 Boo If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a master device and a peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 w
156. dividual bits see 56 OPT Status ade Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items on page 146 57 OPT RX Errors Number of optional I O board receive errors 58 OPT FW Version Firmware version of optional I O board in DPI External Comms Kit Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Viewing and Clearing Events The adapter has an event queue to record significant events that occur in the operation of the adapter When such an event occurs an entry is put into the event queue You can view the event queue with any of these drive configuration tools LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later e DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later e DriveExecutive software version 1 01 or later e Other clients using the DPI Fault object The event queue can contain up to 32 entries Eventually the event queue will become full since its contents are retained through adapter resets At that point a new entry replaces the oldest entry Only an event queue clear operation or adapter power cycle will clear the event queue contents Resetting the adapter to defaults has no effect on the event queue Using the HIM to View and Clear Events Step Example Screen Viewing Events 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 28 2 Press the or GD key to scroll to Diagnostics Main Menu 3 Press
157. down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the 2 In this example we are reading five parameters Each parameter being read requires three contiguous 16 bit words Scattered read messages always assume that every parameter being read is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Therefore the Size in Bytes must be set to 30 The data structure format is the same as shown on page 141 Maximum length is 66 words 132 bytes which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 3 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Scattered Read Request Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 71 or Figure 71 to store the request values to be read from these drive parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Figure 71 Example Scattered Read Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N70 dec Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Rad Decma x Columns 10 v coo I II
158. drive Data Table Address N20 0 An unused controller data table address containing the control timeout value to be written Size in Elements 1 Number of elements words to be transferred Each element size is a 16 bit integer Target Device data for adapter drive Message Timeout 5 Message timeout duration in seconds Data Table Address N42 3 Specific starting address of the destination file in the drive Routing Information File RI9 0 An unused routing information file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project see Table 11 Table 14 starting on page 98 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 97 3 For details on setting the control timeout value and its function see N Files on page 192 The Control Timeout N42 3 is stored in RAM If the 20 COMM ER adapter is power cycled the Control Timeout Message must be re sent If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 75 will error out TIP The Control Timeout N42 3 must be changed to a non zero value 5 20 seconds recommended If the Control Timeout is not changed from a non zero value the control message page 75 will error out The Control Timeout is stored in RAM If the adapter is power cycled the
159. dule Description 1769 L35E Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on CompactLogix5335E 1788 EN2DN A 1788 Ethernet to DeviceNet Linking Device 1788 ENBT A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge Twisted Pair Media 1788 EWEB A 1788 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Bridge w Enhanced Web Services 1794 AENT A 1794 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Drivelogix5730 Ethernet Port 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Port on DriveLogix5730 ETHERNET BRIDGE Generic EtherNet IP CIP Bridge EtherNet IP SoftLogix5800 EtherNet IP PH PSSCENA A Ethernet Adapter Twisted Pair Media Drives HMI gt l Find Add Favorite By Category Favorites In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge 2 Expand the Communications group to display all of the available communication modules 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 3 Select ETHERNET MODULE from the list to configure the drive and its connected 20 COMM ER adapter 4 Click OK The drive s New Module screen appears New Module Type ETHERNET MODULE Generic Ethemet Module Vendor Allen Bradley Parent My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge Name My PowerFlex 70 EC Dive Description Input Output Comm Format Data INT Address Host Name IPAddress 10 C Host Name M Open Module Properties Configuration 91 100 Connection Parameters Assembly Instance Size 1
160. e Class 93 or 9F Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Hex Required for scattered messages Source Element Source Length Scattered Write Request 30 4 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Destination Scattered Write Response The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 2 My_PowerFlex_Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Scattered_Write_Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automa 2 3 4 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using D In this example we are writing to five parameters Each parameter being written to ically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder PI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging requires an array of three INT registers Therefore a controller tag
161. e response value 0 13 amps that was read from drive parameter 003 Output Current To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 55 Example Read Single Response Data File F Data File N40 dec DER E Radix Decimal aj Symbol Columns 10 Desc N40 Properties Usage Help Figure 56 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for read messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Figure 56 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Reads For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters PowerFlex 700S Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 127 Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service A Write Parameter message is used to write to a single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 57 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter 3 B3 0 MSG jE Read Write Message CEN 1 MSG File MGI4 0 CDN gt Setup Screen lt CER 5 Important If the explicit message single write must be writt
162. e Rockwall Auto Quality Exvronmental and uH LAM MEE M weil 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter E a DERRE Remove dustcaten f i i i i F if V 017 mo oec t For F 013 Open type V o14 gt open typowa 938 MAL ID F 013 Open Eyes r Ure Umbela sce F oos 029 3 bror F os 031 atwork P3 nmaxuamsamonszuaa WAIT DAD AAA DAWA Esp 2210 Rocko Ausemilisn Fad AB Boghis Reserewd n Dore j rterrer a AUN e c Click the desired fault alarm check boxes d Click Apply Changes e Click the Back to E mail Configuration Page link 2 Type the following information in their respective boxes Information Description SMTP Server Type in the address of the mail server that will be used to deliver the email messages When the IP address is unknown read the TIP shown below this table to determine the mail server address TO email recipient Type in addresses to where you want email messages to be sent Multiple addresses can be used but they must be separated by commas comma delimited Subject of e mail message Type in the desired subject text for the email message Figure 94 shows an example email message automatically sent by the adapter in response to selected events Figure 94 Example of E mail Message Sent by the Adapter 20 COMM E 10 91 100 79 To idoe example com cc 01 10 2007 03 17 PM bcc Sub
163. e contains all firmware update files and associated Release Notes that describe the following items Firmware update enhancements and anomalies How to determine the existing firmware revision Howto update firmware using DriveExplorer DriveExecutive ControlFLASH or HyperTerminal software Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 45 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using RSLinx Classic Software Chapter Configuring the 1 0 This chapter provides instructions on how to configure a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix or MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller to communicate with the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive Topic Page Using RSLinx Classic Software 47 ControlLogix Controller Example 48 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example 68 RSLinx Classic software in all its variations Lite Gateway OEM and so forth is used to provide a communication link between the computer network and controller RSLinx Classic software requires its network specific driver to be configured before communication is established with network devices To configure the RSLinx driver follow this procedure 1 Start RSLinx Classic software and select Communications gt Configure Drivers to display the Configure Drivers screen 2 From the Available Driver Types pull down menu choose EtherNet IP Driver 3 Click Add New to di
164. e or defined The ControlLogix controller I O image changes depending on the size of the device s Reference Feedback and Datalinks Table Table and Table show the I O image when using various PowerFlex 7 Class drives and all Datalinks enabled Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Table 5 ControlLogix Controller 1 0 Image for Devices with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control SMC Flex smart motor controllers SMC 50 smart motor controllers PowerFlex 700H drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2 Datalink In A1 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A2 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In B1 4 Datalink Out A1 5 Datalink In B2 5 Datalink Out A2 6 Datalink In C1 6 Datalink Out B1 7 Datalink In C2 7 Datalink Out B2 8 Datalink In D1 8 Datalink Out C1 9 Datalink In D2 9 Datalink Out C2 10 Datalink Out D1 11 Datalink Out D2 Table 6 ControlLogix Controller 1 0 Image for Devices with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control PowerFlex D
165. e product Replace Adapter Flashing Green Red Self test on power up No action required Link LS1 LS2 Status The LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the device as shown in the table below Indicator Status Cause dC orrectve Action Blinking Yellow Network at 10M Baud Normal Operation Blinking Green Network at 100M Baudr Normal Operation NET A Status Indicator This red green bicolor LED indicates the status of the network connection as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Actions Off The adapter is not powered the e Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal adapter is not properly connected to Interface ribbon cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable the network the adapter needs an IP Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector address or BOOTP is enabled e Seta unique IP address and disable BOOTP using a BOOTP server or set a unique IP address by using adapter parameters Apply power to the drive or adapter if mounted in a DPI External Comms Kit Steady Red The adapter failed the duplicate IP Configure the adapter to use a unique IP address and cycle power address detection test Flashing Red An EtherNet IP connection has timed e Place the scanner in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device out that will send 1 0 Check the IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches for correct operation Check the amount of traffic on the network R
166. eate the following Program tags for this example program Figure 25 ControlLogix Program Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Style Data Type Command_Clear_Faults Decimal Command Forward Reverse Decimal Command Jog Decimal Command Start Decimal Command Stop Decimal Speed Feedback Decimal Speed Reference Decimal Status Active Decimal Status At Speed Decimal Status Faulted Decimal Status Forward Decimal Status Ready Decimal Status Reverse Decimal For information on speed Reference and Feedback scaling see PowerFlex 7 Class Drives on page 85 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Figure 26 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Drive Generic Profile for Logic Status Feedback My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 0 32 E Status Ready z E My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 1 Status Active My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 3 JE Status_Forward ak Status_Reverse My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 3 JE My PowerFlex Drive Data 2 7 Status_Faulted My_PowerFlex_D rive I Data 2 8 Status At Speed MOV Move Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 3 0e Dest Speed Feedback 0e OP Copy File Source My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 Dest Speed Feedback Length Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 2 PowerFlex 70
167. ed No Default 0 Disabled Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Type Read Only Default XXXX XXX0 Bit Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required No Bit Definition Used Used Used Used Used Used Used Default Bit x No x No ei x No I x No oo x No m x No x No 179 AppendixB Adapter Parameters Notes 180 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects This appendix presents information about the EtherNet IP objects that can be accessed using Explicit Messages For information on the format of Explicit Messages and example ladder logic programs refer to Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging Object Class Code Page Object Class Code Page Hex Dec Hex Dec Identity Object 0x01 1 182 DPI Device Object 0x92 146 196 Assembly Object 0x04 4 183 DPI Parameter Object 0x93 147 198 Register Object 0x07 7 184 DPI Fault Object 0x97 151 204 Parameter Object OxOF 15 185 DPI Alarm Object 0x98 152 206 Parameter Group Object 0x10 16 188 DPI Diagnostic Object 0x99 153 207 Device Level Ring Object 0x47 71 189 DPI Time Object Ox9B 155 209 Quality of Service Object 0x48 72 190 TCP IP Interface Object OxF5 245 211 PCCC Object 0x67 103 190 Ethernet Link Object OxF6 246 213 TIP See
168. elements beginning at N150 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 read ten elements beginning at N150 4 Number of parameters in the drive Drive parameters 1 124 Drive parameters 125 249 Drive parameters 250 374 Drive parameters 375 499 Drive parameters 6125 6249 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 N File N201 N201 0 N201 2 N202 0 N203 0 N203 2 N204 0 N205 0 N205 2 N206 0 N207 0 N207 2 N208 0 N209 0 N209 2 N210 0 N211 0 N2112 N212 0 N212 J 249 249 J 249 249 J 249 249 wl 249 249 J 249 249 J 249 249 Description EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C These N files let you read and write values to DPI and Host parameters in Ports 1 14 for example a HIM or adapter as 32 bit double words You can interpret the data in various ways for example 32 bit real 32 bit integer To read a parameter you need to send a message with two elements For example to read parameter 1 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 1 read two elements beginning at N201 2 As another example to read parameters 2 6 in the peripheral connected to DPI port 5 the adapter read ten elements beginning at N209 4 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 1 Number of p
169. en continuously use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 133 This writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example single write message using Class code F writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the EEPROM life cycle and cause the drive to malfunction MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 58 Write Parameter Message Configuration Screens i MSG MG14 0 1 Elements General Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device To Address Type EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 DER 3 MSG MG14 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Control Bits Channel exa 1 Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Break Connection BK Send Awaiting Execution EW Size in Bytes Receive N A Send ESE Error ER Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 33 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN eel Local Remote Local MultiHop Extended Routing Info File RIX Rix16 0 Error Error Code Hex 0 Service Write Parameter Service Code hex Class hex dec Instance hex ec deck 140 Attribute hex 1 deck Error Description
170. er 140 Accel Time 1 To determine the data type for the parameter and its required scaling see the specific drive documentation Figure 67 Example Set Attribute Single Request Data File 4 Data File N50 dec Radix Decimal pas Columns 10 3 Figure 68 shows example ladder logic to correctly format the three possible data types for write messages in the MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Figure 68 Example Ladder Logic to Format Parameter Data Types for Sets For 16 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit Integer Parameters All PowerFlex 7 Class Drives For 32 bit REAL Floating Point Parameters 7 F8 4 PowerFlex 700S Dest N50 0 Drives Length 2 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read Multiple Parameters Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service A Custom scattered read message is used to read the values of multiple parameters This read message example reads the values of these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Drive e Parameter 001 Output Freq Parameter 003 Output Current Parameter 006 Output Voltage Parameter 012 DC Bus Voltage Parameter 017 Analog In1 Value See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 17 on page 106 for
171. er Datagram Protocol 229 W Web Enable parameter 179 Web Features parameter 179 web pages enabling with parameter 42 for the adapter 153 website BOOTP utility 221 DriveExecutive software 223 DriveExplorer software 223 DriveTools SP software 223 EDS files 224 EtherNet IP 224 manuals 8 ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendor s Association 224 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software 228 wiring see cable Ethernet Z zero data configuring the adapter for 41 definition 229 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Index 235 Index 236 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives www tockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core E Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 20C0MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Supercedes publication 20COMM UM015A EN P June 2013 Copyright 2013 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Prin
172. eral Connection Module Info Requested Packet Interval RPI 10 0 jms 1 0 3200 0 ms F Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Cancel 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 ms or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault boxes unchecked 10 Click OK The new node My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive in this example now appears under the bridge My EtherNet IP Bridge in this example in the I O Configuration folder If you double click the Controller Tags you will see that module defined data types and tags have been automatically created Figure 11 After you save and download the configuration these tags allow you to access the Input and Output data of the drive via the controller s ladder logic For this example all Datalinks A B C and D are enabled The Input Size is set to 12 words and the Output Size is set to 10 words Also the following adapter I O parameters are set to the following values Adapter Parameter No Setting 25 DPI I O Cfg XXXX xxxx XXX1 1111 37 M S Input XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 38 M S Output XXXX XXXX XXX1 1111 11 R
173. es and all Datalinks enabled 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using the 1 0 Chapter 5 Table 8 MicroLogix 1100 1400 I 0 Image for PowerFlex 70 700 700H Drives and SMC Flex 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Not used 1 Not used 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedback MSW 3 Not used 3 Not used 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Not used 5 Not used 6 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Not used 7 Not used 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Not used 9 Not used 10 Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Not used 11 Not used 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 13 Not used 13 Not used 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Not used 15 Not used 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Not used 17 Not used 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 MSW Table 9 MicroLogix 1100 1400 1 0 Image for PowerFlex 700 VC Drives and SMC 50 Controllers 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Not used 1 Not used 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedbac
174. es 224 EEPROM see Nonvolatile Storage NVS EMC Conformance 17 EN Rate Act parameter 173 EN Rate Cfg parameter 172 173 environmental specifications 170 equipment required 13 Ethernet cable 23 connector on adapter 11 Ethernet Link object 189 190 213 EtherNet IP data rates 169 example network for ControlLogix controller 48 MicroLogix 1100 controller 68 network definition 224 objects list of 181 specification 224 events clearing viewing 149 list of 150 explicit messaging about 106 configuring for ControlLogix controller 108 MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller 124 definition 224 performing 106 F fault action configuring the adapter for 41 definition 224 fault configuration configuring the adapter for 42 definition 224 faults see events features 12 firmware revision 7 firmware update definition 229 guidelines 44 Flt Cfg Al D2 In parameters 176 Flt Cfg Logic parameter 175 Flt Cfg Ref parameter 175 full duplex see duplex G gateway 225 gateway address setting with BOOTP 29 setting with parameters 32 Gateway Cfg 1 4 parameters 172 grounding the adapter 22 H half duplex see duplex hardware address definition 225 in diagnostic item 148 on label 29 HIM Human Interface Module accessing parameters with 28 definition 225 LCD model 28 LED model 28 232 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 hold last configuring the adapter for 41 definition 225 host IDs
175. es or transmits data to one PowerFlex 7 Class drive which then sends the same configuration or data to other PowerFlex 7 Class drives on the network To use a peer to peer hierarchy you configure one adapter to transmit data 2 or 4 words and one or more adapters to receive the data Ping A message that is sent by a DPI product to its peripheral devices They use the ping to gather data about the product including whether it can receive messages and whether they can log in for control On EtherNet TIP a ping can be used to determine if a node exists PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class Drives The Allen Bradley PowerFlex 7 Class family of drives supports DPI and at the time of publication includes the PowerFlex 70 PowerFlex 700 PowerFlex 700H PowerFlex 700S PowerFlex 700L and PowerFlex 7000 drives R Reference Feedback The Reference is used to send a setpoint for example speed frequency and torque to the drive It consists of one word of output to the adapter from the Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 227 Glossary 228 network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 32 bit word is determined by the drive Feedback is used to monitor the speed of the drive It consists of one word of input from the adapter to the network The size of the word either a 16 bit word or 22 bit word is determined by the drive RSLogix 5 500 5000 Software RSLogix software is a tool for config
176. eset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 or power cycle the device Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 65 Chapter 4 66 Configuring the 1 0 For the device speed reference and Datalink parameter values and the adapter setup parameter values see Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 90 Figure 11 Controller Tags Force Mask My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive C a A AB ETHERNET_ My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l IE EN AB ETHERNET_ My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data TAS Decimal INT 12 My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive Data 0 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 1 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 2 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 3 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 4 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 7 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 8 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 3 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 10 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive l Data 11 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive O I1 ed AB ETHERNET_ My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data Ic Decimal INT 10 My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 0 0 Decimal INT My_PowerFlex_70_EC_Drive 0 Data 1 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 2 0 Dec
177. ets you read and write some values configuring the port 42 3 Time out read write Time in seconds allowed between messages to the N41 file If the adapter does not receive a message in the specified time it performs the fault action configured in its Comm Flt Action parameter A valid setting is between 1 and 32767 seconds 5 20 seconds is recommended N42 7 Adapter Port Number read only DPI port on the drive to which the adapter is connected N42 8 Peer Adapters read only Bit field of devices having DPI Peer capabilities Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 193 Appendix C 194 EtherNet IP Objects N45 N45 0 N45 1 N45 2 N45 3 N45 4 N45 5 N45 6 N45 7 N45 8 N45 9 N45 10 N45 11 N45 12 N45 13 N45 14 N45 15 N45 16 N45 17 N45 18 N45 19 N45 20 N45 21 N45 22 N45 23 N45 24 N45 25 N45 26 N45 27 N45 28 N45 29 N45 30 N45 31 N45 32 N45 33 N45 34 N45 35 Important N File N150 N199 N150 0 1 N150 2 249 N151 0 249 N152 0 249 N153 0 249 N199 0 249 This N file lets you read and write control 1 0 messages You can write control 1 0 messages only when all ofthe following conditions are true The adapter is not receiving 1 0 from a scanner For example there is no scanner on the network the scanner is in idle program mode the scanner is faulted or the adapter is not mapped to the scanner The adapter is not receiving peer 1 0 fr
178. fg xxx 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 35 M S Input xxxi 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 36 M S Output xxx1 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the drive to the controller on the network TIP Data In parameters are inputs into the device that come from controller outputs for example data to write to a device parameter Data Out parameters are outputs from the device that go to controller inputs for example data to read a device parameter Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Controller Tags When you add the adapter and drive to the I O configuration Chapter 4 RSLogix 5000 software automatically creates generic non descriptive controller tags for them In this example program the following controller tags are used Figure 22 ControlLogix Controller Tags for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp DataType Description My PowerFlex_Drive C AB ETHER My _PowerFlex_Drive AB ETHER L My PowerFlex_Drive 0 AB ETHER You can expand the Input and Output tags to reveal the input and output configuration Figure 23 ControlLogix Input Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp Data Type Description My_PowerFlex_Drive l AB ETHER My PowerFlex Drive l Data INT 12 Input
179. format data types you will always read from and write to the LSW data table address in the controller first Then if the data value exceeds 16 bits the remaining value will be in the MSW data table address Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 97 Chapter 5 98 Using the 1 0 Table 11 Controller Data Table Addresses for PowerFlex 70 70 EC PowerFlex 700 Drives and SMC Flex Controllers Data Table Address Description N20 1 Logic Status see Appendix D N20 2 Reserved N20 3 Speed Feedback N20 4 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 LSW N20 5 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 310 Data Out A1 MSW N20 6 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 LSW N20 7 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 311 Data Out A2 MSW N20 8 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 LSW N20 9 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 312 Data Out B1 MSW N20 10 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 LSW N20 11 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 313 Data Out B2 MSW N20 12 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 LSW N20 13 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 314 Data Out C1 MSW N20 14 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data Out C2 LSW N20 15 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 315 Data
180. from a master or peer device See Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer If you select a Master Slave hierarchy you must also configure the master to communicate with the adapter See Chapter 4 Configuring the I O Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 35 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter Selecti ng M aste r Sl ave or A hierarchy determines the type of device with which the adapter exchanges data P e er to P eer In a Master Slave hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with a master such as a scanner or bridge 1756 ENBT 1756 EN2T 1747 L5 xxx and so forth In a Peer to Peer hierarchy the adapter exchanges data with one or more EtherNet IP adapters in other devices The devices must have compatible Logic Command Status words For both Master Slave and Peer to Peer hierarchies the devices exchanging data must be on the same IP subnet See IP Addresses in the for information about IP subnets Setting a Master Slave Hierarchy Scanner to Drive Communication 1 Enable the desired I O in Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg See Setting the I O Configuration on page 35 2 Setthe bits in Parameter 37 M S Input This parameter determines the data received from the master by the device A 1 enables the I O and a 0 disables the I O Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM ER 0 Logic Command Reference Default Parameter 37 1 Datalink A Input M S Input 2
181. hat will pass the Controller tag data to the Program tags Figure 19 ControlLogix Program Tags for Device Add on Profile Ladder Logic Program Example isi Name amp Style Data Type Decimal BOOL Command_Forward_Reverse Decimal BOOL Command Jog Decimal BDOL E Command_Start Decimal BOOL Command Stop Decimal BODL Speed Feedback Decimal DINT Speed Reference Decimal DINT Status Active Decimal BOOL Status At Speed Decimal BODL Status Faulted Decimal BOOL _ Status_Forward Decimal BOOL 3 Status Ready Decimal BOOL _ Status_Reverse Decimal BOOL An example ladder logic program that uses the automatically created descriptive Controller tags and passes their data to the user defined Program tags is shown in Figure 20 and Figure 21 Note that the prefix for the device Controller tags is determined by the name assigned when configuring the I O Chapter 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Usingthel O Chapter 5 Figure 20 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Device Add on Profile for Logic Status Feedback My PowerF lex Drive I DriveStatus Ready Status Ready dE My PowerFlex D rive I DriveStatus Active Status Active J amp My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus ActualDir Status Forward JE My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus_ActualDi r Status Reverse JE My PowerFlex Drive l DriveStatus Faulted Status Faulted My PowerFlex Dr
182. he DPI peripheral at DPI port 7 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 8 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 9 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 10 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 11 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 12 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 13 Number of parameters in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 1 124 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Parameters 125 249 in the DPI peripheral at DPI port 14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 195 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects DPI Device Object Clas
183. hes D dec 0 z nes een No errors 136 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read multiple parameters General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N60 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 30 9 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX19 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Custom Required for scattered messages Service Code 4B Hex Code for the requested service Class 93 or 9F Hex 9 Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 0 Dec Required for scattered messages Attribute 0 Dec Required for scattered messages MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enab choosing a Service other than Custom from the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable ing entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When pull
184. ick OK The bridge is now configured for the EtherNet IP network added to the RSLogix 5000 project and appears in the I O Configuration folder In our example a 1756 ENBT bridge appears under the I O Configuration folder with its assigned name 1 0 Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 A7 fa 0 1756 163 v16 Example using 20COMME 3 8 RRR ees x Ethernet 50 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 For convenience keep the project open Later in this chapter the project will need to be downloaded to the controller There are three ways to add the adapter into the I O configuration Device Add on Profiles RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later Classic Profile RSLogix 5000 software versions 13 00 15 00 Generic Profile RSLogix 5000 software all versions These are described in separate sections below If your version of RSLogix 5000 software supports device Add on Profiles we recommend that you use this method Using RSLogix 5000 Device Add on Profiles Version 16 00 or Later When compared to using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 or Generic Profile all versions the RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profiles provide the following advantages Profiles for specific drives that provide descriptive controller tags for basic control I O words Logic Command Status and Reference Feedback and Datalinks Additionally Datalin
185. igital DC drives SMC 50 smart motor controllers Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Reference 1 Pad Word 2 Datalink In A1 LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Datalink In A1 MSW 3 Feedback 4 Datalink In A2 LSW 4 Datalink Out A1 LSW 5 Datalink In A2 MSW 5 Datalink Out A1 MSW 6 Datalink In B1 LSW 6 Datalink Out A2 LSW 7 Datalink In B1 MSW 7 Datalink Out A2 MSW 8 Datalink In B2 LSW 8 Datalink Out B1 LSW 9 Datalink In B2 MSW 9 Datalink Out B1 MSW 10 Datalink In C1 LSW 10 Datalink Out B2 LSW 11 Datalink In C1 MSW 11 Datalink Out B2 MSW 12 Datalink In C2 LSW 12 Datalink Out C1 LSW 18 Datalink In C2 MSW 13 Datalink Out C1 MSW 14 Datalink In D1 LSW 14 Datalink Out C2 LSW 15 Datalink In D1 MSW 15 Datalink Out C2 MSW 16 Datalink In D2 LSW 16 Datalink Out D1 LSW 17 Datalink In D2 MSW 17 Datalink Out D1 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 LSW 19 Datalink Out D2 MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 81 Chapterb Using the 0 Table 7 ControlLogix Controller I O Image for Drives with 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Using Generic Profile These products include the following PowerFlex 700S drives with Phase or Phase II control PowerFlex 700L drives with 700S control PowerFlex 753 drives PowerFle
186. igns selected drive parameters to be WRITTEN by the controller Sort Input Output selection When this box is checked sorts the Input Data and Output Data assigned parameters by name and then by number and enables parameter search by name When unchecked sorts the assigned parameters by parameter number and then by name and enables parameter search by number Use Network Reference Conveniently selects the speed reference for the drive to come from the network This box is checked by default When a 32 bit parameter is selected for Input Data or Output Data for a drive with 16 bit Datalinks two contiguous Datalinks for example x1 and x2 where x A B C or D are automatically assigned as a pair to Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 53 Chapter 4 54 Configuring the 1 0 represent that parameter See Datalink examples in the screen shown on the previous page For more information on Datalinks see Using Datalinks on page 86 On the Module Definition screen notice that the automatically assigned controller tags DriveStatus OutputFreq DriveLogicRslt and CommandedFreq are always used When a Datalink is enabled the following 20 COMM ER adapter I O parameters are automatically set Parameter 25 DPI I O Cfg turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will communicate that Datalink s information with the drive Parameter 37 M S Input turn
187. ill be the master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the peer device Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 39 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter 6 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 so that changes to Parameter 42 Peer Cmd Mask take effect 7 Set Parameter 48 Peer Inp Timeout to the maximum amount of time the adapter will wait for a message before timing out Important This value must be greater than the product of Parameter 54 Peer Out Time multiplied by Parameter 55 Peer Out Skip in the adapter from which you are receiving I O For example if the value of Parameter 54 Peer Out Time is 2 00 seconds and the value of Parameter 55 Peer Out Skip is 2 see example screen in step 4 on page 37 then Parameter 48 Peer Inp Timeout needs to have a value greater than 4 00 such as 5 00 in the example screen below Port 5 Device Default 10 00 s 20 COMM ER Parameter 48 Peer Inp Timeout 5 00 S 0 01 10 00 8 Set Parameter 43 Peer Flt Action to the action that the adapter will take if it times out Peer Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected device if peer communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the device You can set this parameter so that the device continues to run however precautions should be taken to ensure that the setting of this parameter does n
188. imal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 3 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 4 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 5 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 7 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 8 0 Decimal INT My PowerFlex 70 EC Drive D Data 9 0 Decimal INT Save the I O Configuration to the Controller After adding the bridge and drive adapter to the I O configuration you must download the configuration to the controller You should also save the configuration to a file on your computer TIP When using RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later you can add the 1 0 configuration of a Generic Profile while the controller is online and in the Run mode 1 In the RSLogix 5000 window select Communications gt Download The Download dialog box appears Download Download offline project v15_Example_using_20COMME to the controller Connected Controller Name no name gt Type 1756 L63 4 ControlLogix5563 Controller Path Ethemet 10 91 100 80 Backplane 0 Serial Number 00244888 Security No Protection Cancel Help Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online select Communications gt Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting
189. information shown in the message configuration screen Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 n Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 Figure 14 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Control Timeout x3 MSG Rung 42 0 MG10 0 ultiHop This Controller Control Bits Channet Mineg 1 Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command 500CPU Write Break Connection BK Data Table Address N20 0 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Elements i suam Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address 42 3 Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MultiHop Yes Routing Information File RI9 0 1 3 MSG Rung 42 0 MG10 0 General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 79 General Tab Box Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Write The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Because the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the SOOCPU controller type was selected The Write command type was selected to write the control timeout value to the
190. ing the 1 0 Limitations Using a MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example 68 Controlling I O with explicit messages is relatively complex compared to normal implicit I O control ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers with EtherNet IP provide the easiest and most integrated form of implicit I O control for a device RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later for ControlLogix and CompactLogix controllers contains integrated profiles for PowerFlex drives that with a few clicks of the mouse automatically create all controller tags and an implicit connection at the specified Requested Packet Interval to control the drive This connection is monitored at both ends to verify that the controller and drive are communicating A watchdog will cause a drive fault if the drive does not respond within approximately 100 milliseconds Therefore using a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller is by far the much preferred method of controlling drives on EtherNet IP If you are not using either of these type of controllers then devices on EtherNet IP can be controlled with explicit messages using MicroLogix 1100 1400 controllers with the following limitations An explicit message is a much slower form of control and is non deterministic This means that you cannot guarantee how long the device will take to start up or stop when the command is given Therefore all equipment used in this manner should be subject t
191. ing the information shown in the message configuration screen Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 73 Chapter 4 74 Configuring the 1 0 Figure 16 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Message Configuration Screens for the Logic Status Feedback and Datalink Out z3 MSG Rung 2 2 MG11 0 jl ultiHop This Controller Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command 500CPU Read Jm Connection BK Data Table Address N20 1 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Elements 19 Error ER Target Device Message done DN Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST Data Table Address N41 0 Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MultiHop Routing Information File RI9 1 i3 MSG Rung 42 2 MG11 0 General Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address This Processor 1 EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 78 General Tab Box Setting This Controller data for MicroLogix 1100 Channel 1 integral Controller port to which the network is connected Communication Command 500CPU Read The controller type and command type for the controller to read or write data Because the MicroLogix 1100 is part of the SLC 500 controller family the 500CPU controller type was selected The Read command type was selected to re
192. intern MAC sublayer TX error DWORD Times of carrier sense condition loss during trans DWORD RX frames exceeding the maximum frame size DWORD RX frames failing due to intern MAC sublayer RX error 6 Get Set Interface Control Struct of Struct of WORD Control Bits UINT Forced Interface Speed 7 Get Interface Type USINT 2 Twisted pair e g 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T etc 8 Get Interface State USINT 0 Unknown interface state 1 The interface is enabled and is ready to send and receive data 2 The interface is disabled 3 The interface is testing 9 Get Set Admin State USINT 1 Enable the interface default 2 Disable the interface 10 Get Interface Label SHORT STRING Instance 1 LS 1 214 Instance 2 LS 2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Appendix D Logic Command Status Words This appendix presents the definitions of the Logic Command and Logic Status words that are used for some products that can be connected to the adapter If the Logic Command Logic Status for the product that you are using is not listed refer to your product s documentation PowerFlex 70 70EC PowerFlex 700 700VC and PowerFlex 700H Drives Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7654 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop 7 0 Not Stop 1 Stop X Start OA 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog Par 100 1 Jog X Clear Faults 0 Not Clear Faults 1 Clear Fau
193. is adapter If the drive indicates a 16 bit datalink size the value appears in the least significant 16 bits of this diagnostic item and the most significant 19 Datalink C1 Out 16 bits of this diagnostic item are zero 20 Datalink C2 Out 21 Datalink D1 Out 22 Datalink D2 Out 23 DPI Rx Errors The present value of the DPI Receive error counter 24 DPI Rx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Receive error counter 25 DPI Tx Errors The present value of the DPI Transmit error counter 26 DPI Tx Error Max The maximum value since reset of the DPI Transmit error counter 27 Boot Flash Count Number of times the boot firmware in the adapter has been flash updated 28 App Flash Count Number of times the application firmware in the adapter has been flash updated 29 M S Input Size Size of data transferred from the network to the drive 30 M S Output Size Size of data transferred from the drive to the network Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 147 Chapter 7 148 Troubleshooting No Name Description Decimal value of each byte in the adapter s Ethernet hardware address 255 255 255 255 255 255 31 HW Addr 1 32 HW Addr2 HW Adar 33 HW Addr 3 HW Addr 2 34 HW Addr 4 HW Addr 3 35 HW Addr 5 HW Adar 4 36 HW Addr 6 HW Addr 5 HW Addr 6 Value of each byte in the adapter s present IP address
194. is consistent with the software configuration before the controller and bridge make a connection Therefore be sure that you have set the correct revision in this screen See the online Help for additional information on this and other Electronic Keying settings If keying is not required select Disable Keying Drives do not require keying and so Disable Keying is recommended Drive Rating The voltage and current rating of the drive If the drive rating is not listed the drive database is not installed on your computer To get the correct drive rating use the Create Database Web Update or Match Drive button described above Connection Parameters via Datalinks When selecting Parameters via Datalinks default the controller tags for the Datalinks use the drive parameter names to which they are assigned When selecting Datalinks the controller tags for the Datalinks have non descriptive UserDefinedData n names like those used in RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 Data Format Parameters When the Connection field is set to Parameters via Datalinks Parameters is automatically selected When the Connection field is set to Datalinks you must select the number of Datalinks required for your application in the Data Format field Datalink A B C D In the Input Data column assigns selected drive parameters to be READ by the controller In the Output Data column ass
195. it integer Extended Routing RIX15 0 An unused routing information file for the controller Service Read Parameter Code for the requested service Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as the parameter number MultiHop Tab Example Value Description To Address 10 91 100 79 IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 The default setting for Service is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service pull down menu When choosing a Service other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 130 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the Size in Bytes would be set to 2 When the parameter being read is a 32 bit REAL floating point data type the size in bytes would be set to 4 See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Read Single Response Data In this message example we use the data table address in Figure 55 to store th
196. ive l DriveStatus AtSpeed Status At Speed aE gt MOV Move Source My PowerFlex Drive l OutputFreq 0e Dest Speed_Feedback 0e Figure 21 ControlLogix Example Ladder Logic Program Using a Device Add on Profile for Logic Command Reference Command Stop My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt Stop JE Command_Start My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRslt Start dt C Command Jog My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt Jog iE Command Clear Faults My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt ClearFault J Command_Forward_Reverse My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt Forward Command Forward Reverse My PowerFlex Drive O DriveLogicRsIt Reverse J E MOV Move Source Speed Reference 0e Dest My PowerFlex Drive O CommandedFreq Oe Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile Versions 1300 15 00 Since the RSLogix 5000 Classic Profile has been significantly improved upon by RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profiles version 16 00 or later we highly Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 89 Chapter 5 90 Using the 1 0 Device PowerFlex 70 EC Drive 20 COMM ER Adapter recommended using the RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profiles to take advantage of their benefits more intuitive time saving and less likely to make ladder logic program errors Creating Ladder Logic Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions Drive and Adapter
197. ject Notice from example drive Seq O Drive at 10 91 100 79 reported fault 81 Port 1 DPI Loss This is an automated message from the 20 COMM E EtherNet IP adapter at IP address 10 91 100 79 Please do not reply to this message as the adapter cannot process replies The DPI host has logged the following fault trip Fault code 81 Fault text Port 1 DPI Loss See this device s Web page at http 10 91 100 79 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 163 Chapter8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages TIP To stop email messages uncheck all of the Send an e mail message when boxes Disabling the adapter web pages by setting the Web Pages Switch SW2 in Figure 2 to the Disable Web position will not stop the adapter from sending email messages 164 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Password Configuration Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 The Password Configuration Link allows the user to set or change a password The factory default configuration is Username Administrator Password none no password is set Figure 95 Password Configuration Page Te T3 369 1 10 y m qe y p Favertes Lim nvescesrti Sario ML m UM he Raho Ago Quy Urtoreartl d Mte namen e O Ate trade 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter Bf Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 165 Chapter8 Viewing the
198. k MSW 3 Datalink In A1 LSW 3 Datalink Out A1 LSW 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Datalink In A2 LSW 5 Datalink Out A2 LSW 6 Datalink In A2 MSW 6 Datalink Out A2 MSW 7 Datalink In B1 LSW 7 Datalink Out B1 LSW 8 Datalink In B1 MSW 8 Datalink Out B1 MSW 9 Datalink In B2 LSW 9 Datalink Out B2 LSW 10 Datalink In B2 MSW 10 Datalink Out B2 MSW 11 Datalink In C1 LSW 11 Datalink Out C1 LSW 12 Datalink In C1 MSW 12 Datalink Out C1 MSW 18 Datalink In C2 LSW 13 Datalink Out C2 LSW 14 Datalink In C2 MSW 14 Datalink Out C2 MSW 15 Datalink In D1 LSW 15 Datalink Out D1 LSW 16 Datalink In D1 MSW 16 Datalink Out D1 MSW 17 Datalink In D2 LSW 17 Datalink Out D2 LSW 18 Datalink In D2 MSW 18 Datalink Out D2 MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 83 Chapterb Using the 0 Using Logic Command Status Using Reference Feedback Table 10 MicroLogix 1100 1400 I O Image for PowerFlex 700S Series Drives 32 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Logic Status 1 Reference LSW 1 Feedback LSW 2 Reference MSW 2 Feedback MSW 3 Datalink In A1 LSW 3 Datalink Out A1 LSW 4 Datalink In A1 MSW 4 Datalink Out A1 MSW 5 Datalink In A2 LSW 5 Datalink Out A2 LSW 6 Datalink
199. ke Values 0 Fault if the adapter detects that the controller is in 1 Stop program mode or faulted This setting is effective 2 Zero Data only if I O that controls the drive is transmitted 3 Hold Last through the adapter When the controller is put 4 Send Fit Cfg back in Run mode the drive will automatically Type Read Write receive commands over the network again Reset Required No when the controller is idle By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a faulted ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 24 Idle IN Fit Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive controller 25 DPII O Cfg Default xxx0 0001 Bit Values 0 I O Disabled Sets the I O that is transferred through the adapter 1 1 0 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes i EJ E o o m c Bit 2 55 z z Z Definition 2 2 2 s s s S 9 olo ow amp WR m m a a eo Default x x x 0 0 1 Bit 7 6 5 3 2 0 174 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Parameter Adapter Parameters Appendix B
200. ks automatically take the name of the drive parameter to which they are assigned These profiles virtually eliminate I O mismatch errors and substantially reduce drive configuration time New Drive tab eliminates the need for a separate drive software configuration tool Drive configuration settings are saved as part of the RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later project file ACD and also downloaded to the controller e Unicast connection RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later Device Add on Profiles can be updated anytime When a new drive is used or to benefit from new updates for Add on Profiles you will need the newest Add on Profile update Go to www ab com support abdrives webupdate to download the latest RSLogix 5000 device Add on Profile To determine your device Add on Profile version see Allen Bradley Knowledgebase document 65882 Add the Drive Adapter to the O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge In this example RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 is used with device Add on Profile version 4 05 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 51 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 1 In the treeview right click on the bridge and choose New Module to display the Select Module screen In our example we right click on the 1756 ENBT A bridge Expand the Drives group to display
201. l setting 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 5 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging 6 In this example Accel Time 1 is a 16 bit parameter requiring the tag Data Type field to be set to INT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must be set to DINT Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for example 4 bytes for a DINT or a REAL When using a PowerFlex 700S drive Accel Time 1 is a floating point number requiring the Data Type field to be set to REAL when creating the controller tag See the drive documentation to determine the size of the parameter and its data type 16 bit or 32 bit integer or REAL ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read or Write Multiple Parameters RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions Because the example ladder logic rungs configuration screens and request response data to read or write multiple parameters using RSLogix 5000 software all versions are identical to those for RSLogix 5000 software version 15 00 or later see the information contained on page 112 through page 119 for complete details When using RSLogix 500 software version 7 10
202. l Operation DPI connected I O Green Operational No action required Red PA CRC of Adapter Parameters or Replace adapter Clear faults in the adapter Verify that all DPI cables on the drive are securely connected and not damaged Replace cables if necessary Verify that the DPI drive supports Datalinks Configure the adapter to use a Datalink that is not already being used by Flashi DPI Failure or Failed power on diagnostic test another peripheral ashing Red hardware failure Check mode switch settings Cycle power to the device If cycling power does not correct the problem the adapter parameter settings may have been corrupted Reset defaults and reconfigure the adapter If resetting defaults does not correct the problem flash the adapter with the latest firmware release Flashing Green and Red 144 Flash update in progress Normal during flash update process of application firmware Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Network Status Indicator The LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the device as shown in the table below Status Cause Corrective Action Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the Internal Interface ribbon cable and to the network using an Ethernet cable Correctly connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet connector Set a unique IP address and disable BOOTP using a BOOTP server or set a unique IP
203. l has begun receiving PCCC Control messages the PCCC Control Timeout was previously set to a non zero value 41 PCCC IO Timeout The Peripheral has not received a PCCC control message for longer than the PCCC Control Timeout 42 Msg Ctrl Open The peripheral has sent a Soft Control Enable command to the host 43 Msg Ctrl Close The peripheral has sent a Soft Control Disable command to the host 44 Msg Ctrl Timeout A Client Server message sent by the peripheral has not completed within one second 45 Peer IO Open The peripheral has received the first peer I O message 46 Peaeic Tieni E e a Peer I O message for longer 56 Email Failed E mail send failure 58 Adapter Defaulted Adapter parameters has been reset to default 61 Net Link 1 Up Link has been established on Eth Port 1 62 Net Link 1 Down Link was lost on Eth Port 1 63 Net Link 2 Up Link has been established on Eth Port 2 64 Net Link 2 Down Link was lost on Eth Port 2 67 Net Ring Up The Device Level Ring DLR status is Normal 68 Net Ring Down The Device Level Ring DLR status is Faulted The adapter s network address configuration parameters are 69 Invalid Net Cfg invalid or the network address provided by the BOOTP or DHCP server is invalid 70 DHCP Response The adapter received a response to its DHCP request Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 151 Chapter7 Troubleshooting Notes 152 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July
204. l vary by device oooo Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Installing the Adapter Chapter 2 Table 1 Drive and Adapter Start Up Status Indications Item Name Color State Description Drive STS Indicator o STS Status Green Flashing Device ready but not running and no faults are present refer to drive or SMC Steady Device running no faults are present manual for Yellow Flashing An inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be started Check device Parameter 214 Start status device stopped Inhibits indication Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Check device Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 information i f device running Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Check device Parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 device running Red Flashing A fault has occurred Steady A non resettable fault has occurred Adapter Status Indicators eo PS Off Steady No power Orange Flashing Requesting DPI I O Connections Steady Peripheral is Connected to an incompatible product or no DPI ping events are detected Green Flashing Normal Operation DPI connected No I O or PLC in Program Steady Normal Operation DPI connected I O Operational Red Flashing DPI Problem Bad CRC of Adapter Parameters or Flash Program Steady DPI Failure or Failed power on diagnostic test
205. le Determines if peer I O output is on or off Peer Out Time Sets the minimum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 53 Peer Out Enable is set to 1 On Peer Out Skip Sets the maximum time that an adapter will wait when transmitting data to a peer The value of Parameter 54 Peer Out Time is multiplied by the value of this parameter to set the time Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 53 Peer Out Enable is set to 1 On Web Enable Displays the setting of the adapter Web Pages Switch SW2 when the adapter was last reset Web Features Sets the access to the Web interface and Web configurable email notification feature Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Adapter Parameters Appendix B Details Default 0 2 Off Default 0 2 Off Values 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input 6 Datalink A Output 7 Datalink B Output 8 Datalink C Output 9 Datalink D Output Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 0 Off Values 0 2 Off 1 On Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 10 00 Seconds Minimum 0 01 Seconds Maximum 10 00 Seconds Type Read Write Reset Required No Default 1 Minimum 1 Maximum 16 Type Read Write Reset Requir
206. lication Parameter Description 27 Fit Cfg Logic A 16 bit value sent to the device for Logic Command 28 Fit Cfg Ref A 32 bit value 0 4294967295 sent to the device as a Reference or 29 Fit Cfg x1 In Datalink through Important If the device uses a 16 bit Reference or 16 bit Datalinks the most 36 Fit Cfg x2 In significant word of the value must be set to zero 0 or a fault will occur Changes to these parameters take effect immediately A reset is not required By using a web browser to access the IP address set for the adapter you can view the adapter s web pages for information about the adapter its connected device and other DPI devices connected to the device such as HIMs or converters Additionally the adapter can be configured to automatically send e mail messages Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Resetting the Adapter Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 to desired addresses when selected device faults occur and or are cleared and or when the adapter takes a communication or idle fault action For more details on the adapters web pages refer to Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages By default the adapter web pages are disabled See Figure 2 and set the Web Pages Switch SW4 to the Enable Web up position Parameter 56 Web Enabled reflects the position of the web enable DIP switch on the adapter Important For a change to the switch se
207. ll pass that data to the data table addresses used for messaging Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 101 Chapterb Using the 0 Table 15 Controller and Program Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Status Feedback Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Description Tapie Address Drive Ready N20 1 0 Status Ready B3 1 0 Drive Active N20 1 1 Status Active B3 1 1 Actual Direction XIO N20 1 3 Status Forward B3 1 3 Actual Direction XIC N20 1 3 Status Reverse B3 1 4 Drive Faulted N20 1 7 Status Faulted B3 1 7 Drive At Speed N20 1 8 Status At Speed B3 1 8 Speed Feedback N20 3 Speed Feedback B30 3 Table 16 Program and Controller Data Table Address Descriptions for Example Logic Command Reference Ladder Logic Program Description Table Address Desoription Table Address Command Stop B3 20 0 Drive Stop N20 20 0 Command Start B3 20 1 Drive Start N20 20 1 Command Jog B3 20 2 Drive Jog N20 20 2 Command Clear Faults B3 20 3 Drive Clear Faults N20 20 3 Command Forward Reverse XIO B3 20 4 Drive Forward N20 20 4 Command Forward Reverse XIC B3 20 4 Drive Reverse N20 20 5 Speed Reference N30 22 Speed Reference N20 22 An example ladder logic program that uses these descriptive controller data table addresses and passes their data to the descriptive program data table addresses is shown in Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 and Figure 33
208. lts x X Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Direction Control Local Control 0 No Local Control 1 Local Control MOP Increment 0 Not Increment 1 Increment x x Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Accel Rate 1 Command Par 140 10 Accel Rate 2 Command Par 141 11 Hold Accel Rate x X Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Decel Rate 1 Command Par 142 10 Decel Rate 2 Command Par 143 11 Hold Decel Rate Reference Select 9 000 No Command 001 Ref A Select Par 90 010 Ref B Select Par 93 011 Preset 3 Par 103 100 Preset 4 Par 104 101 Preset 5 Par 105 110 Preset 6 Par 106 111 Preset 7 Par 107 MOP Decrement 0 Not Decrement 1 Decrement 1 A 0 Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to 0 will not stop the drive Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 215 AppendixD Logic Command Status Words 2 This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 3 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3
209. me clock although a device may not support it The total number of timers can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Real Time Clock Predefined not always supported 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Timer 1 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 3 Timer 2 0x4C00 OxAFFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPI Port 4 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 DPIPort6 209 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Number of timers in the object excluding the real time clock that is predefined 3 Get First Device Specific Timer WORD Instance of the first timer that is not predefined Set Time Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear all timers Does not clear the real time clock or read only timers 5 Get Number of Supported Time Zones WORD Number of time zones described in the Time Zone List attribute 6 Get Time Zone List STRUCT Identifies a time zone 7 Get Set Active Time Zone ID WORD The ID field of the Time Zone List structure for the desired time zone 8 Get Active Time Zone Data STRUCT of
210. message connections are in addition to the I O connection However the trade off for more message connections is decreased network performance If your application cannot tolerate this do not check the Connected box which is recommended Important PowerFlex 7 Class drives have explicit messaging limitations Table 17 shows the EtherNet IP Object Class code compatibilities for these drives Table 17 Explicit Messaging Class Code Compatibility with Drives EtherNet IP Object PowerFlex Explicit Messaging Function Class Code 7 Class Drives Parameter Object OXOF Yes Single parameter reads writes DPI Parameter Object Yes Single and scattered parameter 0x93 reads writes There are five basic events in the Explicit Messaging process The details of each step will vary depending on the type of controller being used See the documentation for your controller Important There must be a request message and a response message for all Explicit Messages whether you are reading or writing data 106 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Figure 34 Explicit Message Process o Set up and send Explicit Message Request Complete Explicit 4 Message s L lem F 1 i Retrieve Explicit 4777777 its o Message Response e A PARER
211. meter assigned to Parameter 651 DPI Data In A1 MSW N20 25 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 LSW N20 26 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 652 DPI Data In A2 MSW N20 27 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 LSW N20 28 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 653 DPI Data In B1 MSW N20 29 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 LSW N20 30 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 654 DPI Data In B2 MSW N20 31 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 LSW N20 32 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 655 DPI Data In C1 MSW N20 33 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 LSW N20 34 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 656 DPI Data In C2 MSW N20 35 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 LSW N20 36 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 657 DPI Data In D1 MSW N20 37 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 LSW N20 38 Value of parameter assigned to Parameter 658 DPI Data In D2 MSW You can use the controller data table addresses to directly control and monitor the drive without creating any ladder logic program However if you intend to use Human Machine Interface devices PanelView and so forth to operate the drive and view its status you will need to create descriptive controller data table addresses Table 15 and Table 16 and a ladder logic program that wi
212. missioning the adapter 26 communications module see adapter compatible products 13 components of the adapter 11 configuration tools 27 Connected Components Workbench software adapter configuration tool 14 27 definition website 221 connecting adapter to the drive 20 network 23 ControlFLASH 221 controller 222 ControlLogix controller configuring the I O 48 explicit messaging 108 using the I O 88 D data rate definition 222 setting 34 Datalink Size parameter 173 Datalinks definition 222 in I O image 80 using 86 device level ring DLR network example 23 diagnostic items 146 dimensions 170 DPI connector on adapter 11 data rates 169 definition 223 Internal Interface cable 20 21 peripheral 223 products 13 223 DPI Alarm object 206 DPI Data Rate parameter 171 DPI Device object 196 DPI Diagnostic object 207 DPI External Comms Kit using adapter in 167 DPI Fault object 204 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 231 Index DPII O Act parameter 175 DPII O Cfg parameter 174 DPI Parameter object 198 DPI Port parameter 171 DPI Time object 209 DriveExecutive software adapter configuration tool 14 27 definition website 223 DriveExplorer software adapter configuration tool 14 27 definition website 223 free lite version 223 drives see PowerFlex drives DriveTools SP software 223 duplex communication mode definition 224 selecting 34 E EDS Electronic Data Sheet fil
213. must set the IP address using a BOOTP DHCP server or by setting the adapter to a valid address 1 254 via the rotary switches on the adapter An invalid address 0 or gt 254 will cause the module to defer to the addressing mode selected by parameter 3 BOOTP DHCP If disabled the adapter will use the address information stored in the adapters database If that address is invalid the adapter will try to contact a DHCP server on the network To use adapter parameters you must disable the BOOTP feature For details see Disable the BOOTP Feature on page 32 Important New settings for some adapter parameters for example Parameters 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 are recognized only when power is applied to the adapter or it is reset After you change parameter settings cycle power or reset the adapter 26 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuration Tools Chapter J Configuring the Adapter This chapter provides instructions and information for setting the parameters in the adapter Topic Page Configuration Tools 27 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM 28 Using BOOTP 29 Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 32 Setting the Data Rate 34 Setting the I O Configuration 35 Selecting Master Slave or Peer to Peer 36 Setting the Reference Adjustment 4 Setting a Fault Action 41 Setting Web Access Control 42 Resetti
214. mware 2 xxx or later or PowerFlex 700 VC drives firmware 3 xxx or later drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select was added to simplify scaling for the speed Reference When drive parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to its default 0 Max Freq the speed Reference scaling is as shown above However when parameter 298 DPI Ref Select is set to 1 Max Speed the speed Reference scaling is equal to parameter 82 Max Speed Parameter 82 Scaling Using the parameter 82 default value speed Reference scaling is 0 32767 0 60 0 Hz If parameter 82 Maximum Speed is changed to 90 Hz then 90 Hz 32767 Speed Feedback uses the same scaling as the speed Reference Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 85 Chapterb Using the 1 0 Using Datalinks 86 TIP For PowerFlex 700 VC drives firmware 3 xxx or later parameter 299 DPI Fdbk Select enables you to select the feedback data coming from the drive over DPI The default is Speed Fdbk in Hz or RPM determined by parameter 079 Speed Units The data selection for parameter 299 is also displayed on the 1st line of the HIM and on DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software screens in the drive status area of the screen The controller in the system sends a reference to the SMC but it is not used for control purposes in the current release The SMC products use the feedback to send motor current information A Datalink is a mechanism
215. n 4 5 S0 8859 5 Cyrillic 6 ISO 8859 6 Arabic 7 1S0 8859 7 Greek 8 150 8859 8 Hebrew 9 ISO 8859 9 Turkish 10 ISO 8859 10 Nordic 255 ISO 10646 Unicode 14 Get Product Option Support BOOL 64 15 Get Languages Supported STRUCT of BYTE Number of Languages BYTE n Language Codes see Class Attribute 2 16 Get Date of Manufacture STRUCT of WORD Year BYTE Month BYTE Day 17 Get Product Revision STRUCT of BYTE Major Firmware Release BYTE Minor Firmware Release 18 Get Serial Number DWORD Value between 0x00000000 and OxFFFFFFFF 19 Set Language Selected BYTE 0 Default HIM will prompt at start up 1 Language was selected no prompt 20 Set Customer Generated Firmware STRING 36 GUID Globally Unique Identifier identifying customer firmware flashed into the device 30 Get International Status Text STRINGN Text describing the status of device with support for Unicode 31 Get Set International User Definable Text STRINGN Text identifying the device with a user supplied name with support for Unicode Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 197 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 34 Get Key Information STRUCT of DWORD Rating Code DWORD Device Serial Number WORD Customization Code WORD Customization Revision WORD Brand Code BYTE Family Code BYTE Config Code BYTE Language Code
216. n DWORD 0 Configuration from NVS Control 2 Configuration from DHCP 4 Get Physical Link Object STRUCT of UINT 2 words Padded EPATH 20 F6 2401 Enet Link Object instance 1 5 Get Set Interface STRUCT of Configuration UDINT IP Address UDINT Network Mask UDINT Gateway Address UDINT Primary DNS UDINT Secondary DNS STRING Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names 6 Get Set Host Name STRING Host name when using DHCP 8 Get Set TTL Value USINT Time to Live value for EtherNet IP multicast packets 9 Get Set Multicast Config Struct of USINT Allocation Control USINT Reserved UINT Number of multicast addresses to allocate 1 4 UDINT Multicast starting address 10 Get Set SelectAcd BOOL Activates the use of ACD 11 LastConflictDetected Struct of USINT AcdActivity USINT 6 RemoteMAC USINT 28 ArpPdu 212 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Ethernet Link Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal OxF6 246 Services The following common services will be implemented for the Ethernet Link Object Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 No Yes Set Attribute Single Ox4C No Yes Get and Clear Instances The adapter supports one instance of the TCP IP Interface object Number Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Object Attributes Ethernet Port 1 2 Object Attributes Etherne
217. n from the controller Parameter 38 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 61 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 When using Datalinks up to 8 Data In xx parameters and or up to 8 Data Out xx parameters must be assigned to point to the appropriate drive parameters for your application Using the RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile All Versions We recommend that you use the basic RSLogix 5000 Generic Profile for only the following reasons e A specific drive profile in other versions of RSLogix 5000 software is unavailable e Users are already familiar with a drive Generic Profile and do not want to convert an existing project to a Classic Profile versions 13 00 15 00 or to a device Add on Profile RSLogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later A project must maintain specific revision level control The controller cannot be taken offline RSlogix 5000 software version 16 00 or later enables the drive Generic Profile to be added while the controller is online and in the Run mode Add the Drive Adapter to the O Configuration To transmit data between the bridge and the drive you must add the drive as a child device to the parent bridge 1 In the treeview right click the bridge and select New Module to display the Select Module screen Wil Select Mo
218. nd Output Size boxes depending on your configuration Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 63 Chapter 4 64 Configuring the 1 0 Table 2 Devices with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 16 bit Datalinks These products include the following SMC Flex smart motor controllers SMC 50 smart motor controllers PowerFlex 70 drives with standard or enhanced control PowerFlex 700 drives with standard control PowerFlex 700H drives Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 16 bit User Configured Settings ue ale le p SzinWords Par 23 Par 35 Par 36 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 6 4 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011 v v vv 8 6 00111 0 0111 00111 v v vvv 10 8 01111 01111 01114 v v Y Y vY U 12 10 1 1111 1 1111 11111 Table 3 Devices with 16 bit Reference Feedback and 32 bit Datalinks These products include the following PowerFlex 700 drives with vector control PowerFlex Digital DC drives PowerFlex 700L drives with 700 control SMC Controllers Logic Ref Fdbk Datalinks 32 bit User Configured Settings a ie m Sizein Words Par 23 Par 35 Par 36 Input Output DPI I O Cfg M S Input M S Output v v 4 2 0 0001 0 0001 0 0001 v v v 8 6 0 0011 0 0011 0 0011
219. nd Parameter with a non zero value the offline software tool will change the value to zero Note that command parameters cannot have values that do not return to zero Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 203 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Bit Name Description 28 Current Value Is Default This bit identifies a parameter that will not change if a Reset Defaults is commanded For example if a drive contains a Language parameter that is set to German setting defaults will leave the parameter set to German Likewise if the parameter is set to French setting defaults will leave the parameter set to French 29 Use Zero Text If the Disallow Zero bit is set this bit must be cleared If the Disallow Zero bit is cleared then 0 Use Disabled Text parameter class attribute 1 Use Zero Text parameter instance attribute 30 31 Reserved Reserved Formulas for Converting Display Value Internal Value Offset x Multiplier x Base Divisor x 10 Decimal Places Internal Value Display Value x Divisor x 102ec ma Places Multiplier x Base Offset Common Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance Ox0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set_Attribute_Single Object Specific Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Allocation Size in bytes Class Instance Par Number _ Par Value 0x4B Yes No Get
220. network data Values d 7 i vid Full rate used by the adapter 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Type Read Only 18 EN P2 Rate Cfg Default 0 Autodetect Sets the speed and duplex network data rate at Values i MEE i which the adapter communicates Updates 9 E i Mbps iu Parameter 19 EN PI Rate Act after a reset 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Type Read Write Reset Required Yes 19 EN P2 Rate Act Default 0 No Link Displays the actual speed and duplex network data Values i vd Full rate used by the adapter 2 10 Mbps Half 3 100 Mbps Full 4 100 Mbps Half Type Read Only 20 Ref Fdbk Size Default 0 16 bit Displays the size of the Reference Feedback The Values o a drive determines the size of the Reference 32 bit Feedback Type Read Only 21 Datalink Size Default 0 16 bit Displays the size of each Datalink word The drive Values i ban determines the size of Datalinks 32 bit Type Read Only 22 Reset Module Default 0 Ready No action if set to 0 Ready Resets the adapter if Values 0 iat dul set to 1 Reset Module Restores the adapter to z PD its factory default settings if set to 2 Set Defaults Type Read Write This parameter is a command It will be reset to 0 Ready after the command has been performed A adapter Reset Required No ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is t
221. nfigure a message to read a single parameter Configuration Tab Example Value Description Message Type CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type t Parameter Read This service is used to read a parameter value Service Code e Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 3 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than automatically assigned to the Service Code box which 2 Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is is dimmed unavailable Only drive parameters Port 0 can be read using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To read a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 121 3 4 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder
222. ng network used to lost connections that break the ring Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Glossary DLR Ring Supervisor A node that sends beacon and announce frames on a ring network to monitor and maintain connectivity by re configuring the ring while nodes are disconnected or reconnected DPI Drive Peripheral Interface A second generation peripheral communication interface used by various Allen Bradley drives and power products such as PowerFlex 7 Class drives and SMC controllers It is a functional enhancement to SCANport DPI Peripheral A device that provides an interface between DPI and a network or user Peripheral devices are also referred to as adapters or modules The 20 COMM ER adapter 1203 USB or 1203 SSS converter and PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs 20 HIM xxx are examples of DPI peripherals DPI Product A device that uses the DPI communications interface to communicate with one or more peripheral devices For example a motor drive such as a PowerFlex 7 Class drive is a DPI product In this manual a DPI product is also referred to as drive or host DriveExplorer Software A tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems DriveExplorer software version 3 xx or later can be used to configure this adapter and PowerFlex drives This sof
223. ng the Adapter 43 Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters 44 Updating the Adapter Firmware 44 For a list of parameters see Appendix B Adapter Parameters For definitions of terms in this chapter see the The adapter stores parameters and other information in its own nonvolatile storage NVS memory You must therefore access the adapter to view and edit its parameters The following tools can be used to access the adapter parameters Tool See PowerFlex 7 Class HIM page 28 BOOTP DHOP server page 29 Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later http Avww ab com support abdrives webupdate software html or online help installed with the software Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 27 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter Using the PowerFlex 7 If your drive has either an LED or LCD HIM Human Interface Module it can Cl ass HIM be used to access parameters in the adapter as shown below It is recommended that you read through the steps for your HIM before performing the sequence For additional information see the drive documentation or the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QROO0I Using an LED HIM Step Example Screens 1 Press the key and then the Device Sel key to display the Device Screen 2 Press the 9 or GD key to scroll to the adapter Letters C f1 represent files in the drive and numbers represent p
224. ng the adapter do the following Make sure the Ethernet switch is the correct type A managed switch that supports IGMP snooping is usually recommended An unmanaged switch can be used instead if RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later is used and all devices on the network are configured for unicast I O For more details see the following documents EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 EtherNet IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines ODVA publication 35 Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual publication ENET RM002 Understand IGMP Snooping Ethernet Switches The 20 COMM ER adapter is a multicast device In most situations an IGMP snooping managed switch is required If more than one or two 20 COMM ER adapters are connected to the switch a managed switch is required otherwise the drive may fault on a DPI Port x network loss The 20 COMM ER RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later and a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller will support unicast Unicast setup is required when adding the drive to the I O When all adapters are set up as unicast devices then an IGMP snooping managed switch is not needed Much of EtherNet IP implicit I O messaging uses IP multicast to distribute I O control data which is consistent with the CIP producer consumer model Historically most switches have treated multicast packets the same as broadcast
225. nt Adapter Event 0x5400 0x57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 0x5BFF 22528 23551 DPI Port 6 Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Class Revision WORD Revision of object 2 Get Number of Instances WORD Maximum number of faults events that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Fault Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Fault Event 2 Clear Fault Event Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Trip Instance Read WORD Fault that tripped the device For adapters this value is always 1 when faulted 5 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates BYTE the fault queue is empty BYTE WORD n 6 Get Number of Recorded Faults WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty 7 Get Fault Parameter Reference WORD Number of faults events in the queue A 0 indicates the fault queue is empty Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 205 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Fault code STRUCT of Fault source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Fault text STRUCT of Fault time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time
226. ntroller Control Bits Channel 1 Integral Ignore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Bon Connection BK Data Table Address Receive 40 0 Awaiting Execution EW Size in Bytes Receive 4 Send Error ER Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Target Device Message Timeout 33 Local Remote Local Extended Routing Info File RIx RIx15 0 Service Generic Get Attribute Single Service Code hex E Class hex 93 deck 147 Instance hex 3 dec 3 Attribute hex 8 deck B MultiHop ves Error Error Code Hex 0 10 91 100 73 Error Description No errors The following table identifies the data that is required in each box to configure a message to read a single parameter General Tab Example Value Description Channel 1 Controller port to which the network is connected Comm Command CIP Generic Used to access the Parameter Object in the adapter Data Table Address N40 0 An unused controller data table address containing the message instruction This address is the starting word of the destination file Size in Bytes 49 Number of bytes to be transferred Each byte size is an 8 bit integer Extended Routing RIX15 0 An unused routing information file for the controller
227. o a risk assessment taking into account the mechanical and electrical implementation A timeout value in seconds in the EtherNet IP adapter will issue a device fault if a message is not received from the controller within the specified time However the controller has no way of detecting a loss of communication to the device until the next cycle of explicit messages This is another factor in the risk assessment Any additional devices to be controlled will require additional explicit messages for their control and they need to be carefully sequenced Most controllers have small communication queues see the User Manual which need to be carefully managed if messages are not to be lost Each controller has a limited number of communication connections see its User Manual for maximum connections which will limit the number of drives that can be connected In summary unlike a ControlLogix or CompactLogix controller programming a MicroLogix 1100 1400 controller by using RSLogix 500 software with explicit messages is more difficult and produces a more complex program After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 12 In our example we will configure a MicroLogix 1100 controller to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks over the network
228. o store the request values to be written to these drive parameters See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Figure 75 or Figure 76 shows the parameter values Figure 75 Example Scattered Write Request Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive 9 i Data File N90 dec E Radix Decimal aa Columns 10 O A 140 Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Scattered Write Hesponse Data In this message example we use the data table addresses in Figure 76 to store the response values that were written to the requested drive parameters Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred Figure 76 Example Scattered Write Response Data File for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Data File N80 dec Radix Decimal pe Columns 10 Ee The results of the explicit message appear in the destination tag array N80 Figure 76 Values of 0 indicate no errors occurred MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Explanation of Request and Response Data for Read Write Multiple Messaging The data structures in Figure 77 and Figure 78 use 16 bit words and can accommodate up to 22 parameters in a single message In the Response Message a parameter number with the high bit set indicates that the associated parameter value field contains an error c
229. o these parameters are ignored when Parameter 49 Peer Inp Enable is set to 1 On Important If the parameter is set to input a Logic Command configure the mask in Parameter 42 Peer Cmd Mask so that the desired bits from the peer device are used Adapter Parameters Appendix B Details Default 0 Off Default 0 Off Values 0 Off 1 Cmd Ref 2 Datalink A Input 3 Datalink B Input 4 Datalink C Input 5 Datalink D Input Type Read Write Reset Required No Peer Cmd Mask Sets the mask for the Logic Command word when it is received through peer input If the mask bit is 0 Off the command bit is ignored and not used If the mask bit is 1 On the command bit is checked and used Important If the adapter receives a Logic Command from both a Master device and a peer device each command bit must have only one source The source of command bits set to 0 will be the Master device The source of command bits set to 1 will be the peer device Default 0000 0000 0000 0000 Minimum 0000 0000 0000 0000 Maximum 1111 1111 1111 1111 Values 0 Ignore bit 1 Check bit Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Peer Flt Action Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take if the adapter detects that peer I O communication has been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O is transmitted through the adapter A Default Values 0 Fault 0
230. ockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 145 Chapter7 Troubleshooting Status Flashing Red Green Cause Corrective Actions The adapter is performing a self test No action required Flashing Green The adapter is properly connected has e Place the controller in RUN mode or apply power to the peer device an IP address and is connected to an that will send 1 0 EtherNet I P network but does not have Program the controller or peer device to recognize and transmit 1 0 an I O connection or make a messaging connection to the adapter e Configure the adapter for the program in the controller or the 1 0 from the peer device Steady Green The adapt communicating on the network to a controller Hardware Reset via Node Switches Viewing Adapter Diagnostic Items 146 er is properly connected and No action required The special switch value of 888 allows the user to return the module to its factory default configuration The setting of 888 shall reset all local configuration parameters on the adapter The setting of 888 is useful in situations where the user wishes to decommission an adapter but may use it again later e g as a spare module or when the user wishes to commission a previously used module that has unknown configuration parameters When the switches are set to 888 upon the next power up a module shall behave as follows Return to facto
231. ode parameter number in response data will be negative Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Figure 77 Data Structures for Scattered Read Messages Request Source Data Response Destination Data Word 0 Parameter Number Word 0 Parameter Number 1 Pad Word 1 Parameter Value LSW 2 Pad Word 2 Parameter Value MSW 3 Parameter Number 3 Parameter Number 4 Pad Word 4 Parameter Value LSW 5 Pad Word 5 Parameter Value MSW 6 Parameter Number 6 Parameter Number 7 Pad Word 7 Parameter Value LSW 8 Pad Word 8 Parameter Value MSW 9 Parameter Number 9 Parameter Number 10 Pad Word 10 Parameter Value LSW 11 Pad Word 11 Parameter Value MSW 12 Parameter Number 12 Parameter Number 13 Pad Word 13 Parameter Value LSW 14 Pad Word 14 Parameter Value MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 141 Chapter 6 142 Using Explicit Messaging 63 64 65 Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word 63 64 65 Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Figure 78 Data Structures for Scattered Write Messages o o co 405 01 C5 rno c lll 4 C0 n0 O o 63 64 65 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070M
232. of Parameter 55 Peer Out Skip In the example below the minimum interval is set to 2 00 seconds Parameter 54 Peer Out Time and the maximum interval is set to 4 00 seconds 2 00 x 2 setting of Parameter 55 Peer Out Skip Port 5 Device Port 5 Device 20 COMM ER 20 COMM ER Parameter 54 Parameter 55 Peer Out Time Peer Out Skip 2007 ME 0 10 00 1 516 Default 10 00 s Default 1 5 Set Parameter 53 Peer Out Enable to 1 On The adapter will transmit the data selected in Parameters 51 Peer A Output and 52 Peer B Output to the network Another adapter must be configured to receive the peer I O data Setting the Adapter to Receive Peer to Peer Data 1 Verify that Parameter 49 Peer Inp Enable is set to 0 Off This parameter must be Off while you configure the peer input parameters Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 49 1 On Peer Inp Enable ff 2 Set Parameters 44 Peer Inp Addr 1 through 47 Peer Inp Addr 4 to the IP address of the node from which you want to receive data Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 Valid nodes must have 20 COMM ER adapters connected to drives with compatible Logic Command Status words IP Address of Node 255 255 255 2 Port 5 Device Transmitting Peer 1 0 i aati 20 COMM ER Peer Inp A
233. offline parameter units 1 A CONTAINER is a 32 bit block of data that contains the data type used by a parameter value If signed the value is sign extended Padding is used in the CONTAINER to ensure that it is always 32 bits 2 This value is used in the formulas used to convert the parameter value between display units and internal units See Formulas for Converting on page 204 3 Do not continually write parameter data to NVS See the attention on page 105 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 201 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Descriptor Attributes Bit Name Description 0 Data Type Bit 1 Right bit is least significant bit 0 1 Data Type Bit 2 a as n 2 an array of ra used as an array of Boolean 2 Data Type Bit3 010 BYTE 8 bit integer j 011 WORD 16 bit integer 100 DWORD 32 bit integer 101 TCHAR 8 bit not unicode or 16 bits unicode 110 REAL 32 bit floating point value 111 Use bits 16 17 18 3 Sign Type 0 Unsigned 1 Signed 4 Hidden 0 Visible 1 Hidden 5 Not a Link Sink 0 Parameter can sink a link 1 Parameter cannot sink a link 6 Not Recallable 0 Recallable from NVS 1 Not Recallable from NVS 7 ENUM 0 No ENUM text 1 ENUM text 8 Writable 0 Read only 1 Read write 9 Not Writable When Enabled 0 Writable when enabled fo
234. ofile Value Data Type Description AB ETHER INT 12 Input Image L Data D INT Pad Word i My PowerFlex Data 1 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 2 INT Pad Word INT Logic Status My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 3 INT Speed Feedback t My PowerFlex Drive l Data 4 INT Datalink Out A1 INT Datalink Qut A2 My PowerFles Drive Data G INT Datalink Out B1 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 7 My PowerFlex Drive l Data 8 INT Datalink Out B2 INT Datalink Out C1 My_PowerFlex_Drive Data 9 INT Datalink Out C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive l Data 10 INT Datalink Out D1 ly PowerFlex Drive l Data 11 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 INT Datalink Out D2 AB ETHER My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data ES My PowerFlex Diive O Data O My PowerFlex Drive D Data 1 tH JNT IO Output Image INT Logic Command INT Speed Reference My PowerFlex Drive D Data 2 INT Datalink In A1 My PowerFlex Drive D Data 3 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 4 Pests INT Datalink In A2 INT DatainkInBl My PowerFlex Drive D Data 5 INT Datalink In B2 Discuss Bam ly PowerFlex Drive O Data 7 Datalink In C1 INT Datalink In C2 ly PowerFlex Drive D Data 8 INT Datalink In D1 E My PowerFlex Drive D Data S INT Datalink In D2 My PowerFlex Drive l Data Type AB ETHER Description
235. ogix 5000 Software All Versions A Scattered Write message is used to write to multiple parameters This write message example writes the following values to these five parameters PowerFlex 7 Class Write Value Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 1 1 1 c 5 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 6 Preset Speed 6 44 4 Hz 7 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz c e See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 21 Example Controller Tags to Write Multiple Parameters Operand Controller Tags for Write Multiple Message Data Type XIC Execute Scattered Write Message BOOL MSG Scattered Write Message MESSAGE Figure 43 Example Ladder Logic to Write Multiple Parameters Execute Scattered Write Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Scattered Write Message KC DN gt KCERD Important If the explicit message scattered write must be written continuously then use a separate explicit message single write for each parameter using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 and attribute A 10 decimal see page 123 Attribute A writes to RAM not NVS EEPROM memory This example scattered write message using attribute 0 writes to NVS Over time continuous writes will exceed the
236. om another adapter The value of N42 3 is set to a non zero value Write Read Logic Command least significant Logic Command most significant Reference least significant Reference most significant Logic Status least significant Logic Status most significant Feedback least significant Feedback most significant DL From Net 01 least significant DL From Net 01 most significant DL From Net 02 least significant DL From Net 02 most significant DL From Net 03 least significant DL From Net 03 most significant DL From Net 04 least significant DL From Net 04 most significant DL From Net 05 least significant DL From Net 05 most significant DL From Net 06 least significant DL From Net 06 most significant DL From Net 07 least significant DL From Net 07 most significant DL From Net 08 least significant DL From Net 08 most significant DL From Net 09 least significant DL From Net 09 most significant DL From Net 10 least significant DL From Net 10 most significant DL From Net 11 least significant DL From Net 11 most significant DL From Net 12 least significant DL From Net 12 most significant DL From Net 13 least significant DL From Net 13 most significant DL From Net 14 least significant DL From Net 14 most significant DL From Net 15 least significant DL From Net 15 most significant DL From Net 16 least significant DL From Net 16 most significant DL To Net 01 least significant DL
237. on When communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected the adapter and PowerFlex drive can respond with a user defined fault configuration The user sets the data that is sent to the drive using specific fault configuration parameters in the adapter When a fault action parameter is set to use the fault Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Glossary configuration data and a fault occurs the data from these parameters is sent as the Logic Command Reference and or Datalinks G Gateway A device on a network that connects an individual network to a system of networks When a node needs to communicate with a node on another network a gateway transfers the data between the two networks You need to configure the address for the gateway device in the adapter if you want the adapter to communicate with devices that are not on its network H Hardware Address Each Ethernet device has a unique hardware address sometimes called a MAC address that is 48 bits The address appears as six digits separated by colons for example xx xx xx xx xx xx Each digit has a value between 0 and 255 0x00 and OxFF This address is assigned in the hardware and cannot be changed It is required to identify the device if you are using a BOOTP server HIM Human Interface Module A device that can be used to configure and control a drive PowerFlex 7 Class HIMs catalog number 20 HIM xx can be used to configure
238. on 150 UM008 Information on installing programming and technical data of SMC Flex State Smart Motor Controller SMC 50 Solid State Smart Motor Controller User Manual publication 150 UMO11 Information on installing programming and technical data of SMC 50 Solid State Smart Motor Controller PowerFlex Digital DC Drive User Manual publication 20P UMO001 Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex Digital DC drives Getting Results with RSLinx Guide publication LINX GROO1and online help Information on using RSLinx Classic software RSLogix Emulate 5 500 Getting Results Guide publication EMULAT GRO02 and online help Information on how to install and navigate the RSLogix Emulate software for ladder logic programming with Allen Bradley9 PLC 59 and SLC 500 processors RSLogix 500 Getting Results Guide publication LG500 GR002 and online help Information on using RSLogix 500 software tool Pogi 5000 PIDE Autotuner Getting Results Guide publication PIDE GR001 and online help Information on using RSLogix 5000 software tool EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UM001 Information on using the ControlLogix 1756 ENBT or 1756 EN2T EtherNet IP communication modules with your Logix5000 controller and communicating with various devices on the EtherNet IP network Enhanced and Ethernet PLC 5 Programmable Controllers User Manual
239. or greater This value determines the maximum interval that a controller should use to move data to and from the adapter To conserve bandwidth use higher values for communicating with low priority devices The Inhibit Module box when checked inhibits the module from communicating with the RSLogix 5000 project When the Major Fault on box is checked a major controller fault will occur when the module s connection fails while the controller is in the Run Mode For this example leave the Inhibit Module and Major Fault On boxes unchecked Important Unicast support has been added to RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later However to also support unicast the controller firmware must be version 18 00 or later Unicast is recommended whenever possible For the benefits of unicast operation see Preparing for an Installation on page 18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 55 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 10 On the New Module screen click the Port Configuration tab DER E New Module General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Enable BootP Status Offline 11 In the Port Configuration tab screen edit the following information Box IP Address Setting The IP address of the adapter that was already set in the General tab This field is not configurable grayed out
240. ore details see page 162 1 On a computer with access to the EtherNet IP network on which the adapter device is installed launch a web browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer version 5 0 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 153 Chapter8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages The computer can access the adapter web pages if it is connected to The same network as the adapter A network with access to the adapter s network via a gateway device for example a router 2 In the Address box type the IP address of the adapter 3 Press ENTER The adapter web Home Page Figure 79 appears Important Using the browser s View gt Refresh function will always re display the adapter home page while viewing any of the adapter s web pages Figure 79 Adapter Web Home Page Example Rockwell Automation Crgynqit 2013 Recknelt turam bn Ad Rights Masones ns Title Bar on Adapter Web Pages The title bar appears on the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter s other web pages The title bar consists of three elements as shown in Figure 79 Title Bar Element Description Allen Bradley logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the ab com web Home Page Adapter Title Shows the adapter type or user configurable title Rockwell Automation logo This logo is a hyperlink Click it to view the Rockwell Automation web Home Page 154 Rockwell Au
241. orts The II adapter is usually connected to port 5 LI 3 Press the Enter key to enter your selection A parameter database is constructed and then the first parameter is displayed 4 Editthe parameters using the same techniques that you use to edit drive parameters Using an LCD HIM Step Example Screens 1 In the main menu press the or GD key to scroll to Device Select F gt Stopped Auto 2 Press the Enter key to enter your selection Hz Main Menu 3 Press the or key to scroll to the adapter 20 Diagnostics COMM ER Parameter Device Select 4 Press the Enter key to select the adapter A parameter database is constructed and then the main Port 5 Device menu for the adapter is displayed 20 COMM ER 5 Edit the parameters using the same techniques that you use to leali Meny pt agnostics edit drive parameters Device Select NOTE All configuration procedures throughout this chapter use the PowerFlex 7 Class LCD HIM to access parameters in the adapter and show example LCD HIM screens TIP When using a PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 or 20 HIM C6S HIM see its User Manual publication 20 HIM UM001 SMC Flex controllers require an external HIM A3 or A6 to program the adapter The internal Human Interface of the SMC Flex does not allow programming of the Adapter 28 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 201
242. ot Applied to Motor Phasing 1 ABC Phasing 0 CBA Phasing X Phasing 1 3 phase is valid Active 0 No valid 3 phase detected X Starting 1 Performing a Start Maneuver Accel 0 Not Performing a Start Maneuver X Stopping 1 Performing a Stop Maneuver Decel 0 Not Performing a Stop Maneuver X Alarm 1 Alarm Present 0 No Alarm Present X Fault 1 Fault Condition Exists 0 No Fault Condition X At Speed 1 Full Voltage Applied 0 Not Full Voltage Applied X Start 1 Start Isolation Contactor Enabled Isolation 0 Start Isolation Contactor Disabled X Bypass 1 External Bypass Contactor Enabled 0 External Bypass Contactor Disabled X Ready 1 Ready 0 Not Ready X Option 1 1 Input Active Input 0 Input Inactive X Option 2 1 Input Active Input 0 Input Inactive Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Bits 14 and 15 Not Used 219 AppendixD Logic Command Status Words Logic Command Word Control Bit Status Description 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X Stop 1 Stop Inhibit 0 No Action X Start 1 Start 0 No Action X Option 1 1 Stop Maneuver Inhibit Input 0 No Action X Clear Faults 1 Clear Faults 0 No Action X Option 2 1 Perform Option 2 function Input 0 No Action Bits 5 10
243. ot create a hazard of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the device verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable i ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 43 Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Fault Default Parameter 43 1 Stop Peer Flt Action 2 Zero Data Fault 3 Hold Last 4 Send Fit Cfg For more details see Setting a Fault Action on page 41 9 Set Parameter 49 Peer Inp Enable to 1 On The adapter is now configured to receive peer I O from the specified node Ensure that the specified node is configured to transmit peer I O 40 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Setting the Reference Adjustment Setting a Fault Action Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 A Reference Adjustment is a percent scaling factor for the Reference from the network It can be set from 0 00 200 00 to allow the drive s Reference to either match the network Reference 100 00 scale below the network Reference lt 100 00 or scale above the network Reference gt 100 00 The SMC controllers do not currently use the reference data sent in the IO frame No Reference configuration is required Refer to the applicable SMC user manual for the latest reference configuration information ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or personal injury A note tha
244. output to the network Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 51 Logic Command Reference Peer A Output Datalink A B C or D Input E Bc olan Datalink A B C or D Output 3 If desired set Parameter 52 Peer B Output to select an additional source of the data to output to the network Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Off Default Parameter 52 1 Logic Command Reference Peer B a 2 5 Datalink A B C or D Input DL A Input 6 Datalink A B C or D Output 4 Set Parameters 54 Peer Out Time and 55 Peer Out Skip to establish the minimum and maximum intervals between peer messages Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 37 Chapter 3 Configuring the Adapter 38 Because the adapter transmits peer messages when a change of state condition occurs minimum and maximum intervals are required The minimum interval ensures that the adapter does not transmit messages on the network too often thus minimizing network traffic Set it with Parameter 54 Peer Out Time The maximum interval ensures that the adapter transmits messages often enough so that the receiving adapter s can receive recent data and verify that communications are working or if communications are not working can timeout The maximum interval is the value of Parameter 54 Peer Out Time multiplied by the value
245. oving the adapter Connecting the Adapter to i ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may 1 Remove power from the drive 2 Use static control precautions 3 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the network See Figure 5 for an example of wiring to an EtherNet IP network Figure 5 Connecting the Ethernet Cable in a Linear Topology Network Drive or Suc Controller with 20 COMM ER Option Modules ControlLogix controller re shown with i did Bridge al EtherNet IP t Bete _ networks U us U Computer with Ethernet Connection Ethernet S Switch 0 The option modules ENET1 and ENET2 network ports are used Figure 6 Connecting the Ethernet Cable in a DLR Topology Network To other Drive or SMC EtherNet IP with 20 COMM ER Option Modules networks Controller r ControlLogix controller shown with 1756 EN2TR Bridge 1783 ETAP Computer with 1783 ETAP 8 Ethernet Connection The option module s ENET1 and ENET2 network ports are used 4 For Linear or DLR Network Topology route the other end of the Ethernet cable from the network through the bottom of the first drive and insert its cable plug into the option module ENET1 network port Rockwell Automation Publication 2
246. owerFlex drives compatible with adapter 13 definition 227 HIM 28 installing adapter on 20 preparing for an installation 18 processor see controller programmable logic controller see controller Q quick start 16 R Ref Adjust parameter 176 Ref Fdbk Size parameter 173 Reference Feedback definition 227 in I O image for ControlLogix controller 80 PLC 5 SLC 500 or MicroLogix 1100 controllers 82 setting an adjustment 41 using 84 Register object 184 regulatory compliance 170 related documentation 8 requested packet interval 55 65 Reset Module parameter 173 ribbon cable see Internal Interface cable RSLinx Classic software documentation 9 using 47 RSLogix 5 500 5000 software 228 S safety precautions 15 scanner 228 SLC 500 controller limitations when using the I O 68 using the I O 96 specifications adapter 169 EtherNet IP address 224 EtherNet IP subnet mask 228 234 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 status indicators definition 228 Link 145 NET A 145 NET B 144 Network 145 normal operation 24 PORT 144 troubleshooting with 144 145 145 understanding 143 Subnet Cfg 1 4 parameters 172 subnet mask definition 228 setting with BOOTP 29 setting with parameters 32 switches 228 T TCP Transmission Control Protocol 229 TCP IP Interface object 211 technical support 8 tools required 13 troubleshooting 143 151 U UDDT User Defined Data Type 229 UDP Us
247. packets That is all multicast packets are re transmitted to all ports IGMP snooping constrains the flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring switch ports so that multicast traffic is forwarded only to ports associated with a particular IP multicast group Switches that support IGMP snooping managed switches learn which ports have devices that are part of a particular multicast group and only forward the multicast packets to the ports that are part of the multicast group Be careful as to what level of support a switch has of IGMP snooping Some layer 2 switches that support IGMP snooping require a router which could be a layer 3 switch to send out IGMP polls to learn what devices are part of the multicast group Some layer 2 switches can use IGMP snooping without a router sending polls If your control system is a standalone network or is required to continue performing if the router is out of service make sure the switch you are using supports IGMP snooping without a router being present Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Installing the Adapter Chapter 2 See Appendix A for the number of CIP connections supported by the 20 COMM ER adapter Verify that you have all required equipment See Required Equipment on page 13 Setting the Web Pages To use the adapter web pages the Web Pages Switch must be set to its Enable Swit ch Web position For information to enable
248. pport download detail cfm ID 3390 Bridge A network device that can route messages from one network to another A bridge also refers to a communications module in a ControlLogix controller that connects the controller to a network See also Scanner C CIP Common Industrial Protocol CIP is the transport and application layer protocol used for messaging over EtherNet IP ControlNet and DeviceNet networks The protocol is used for implicit messaging real time I O and explicit messaging configuration data collection and diagnostics Connected Components Workbench Software The recommended tool for monitoring and configuring Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters It can be used on computers running various Microsoft Windows operating systems You can obtain a free copy of Connect Components Workbench software at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html ControlFLASH A free software tool used to electronically update firmware of Allen Bradley products and network communication adapters ControlFLASH software is downloaded automatically when the firmware revision file for the product bein y P 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 20C0MM UM015B EN P July 2013 221 Glossary 222 updated is downloaded from the Allen Bradley updates website to your computer Controller A controller also called programmable logic controller is a solid state control system that has a user programmable
249. pter Diagnostic Items No Name Description 1 Common Logic Cmd The present value of the Common Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter 2 Prod Logic Cmd The present value of the Product Logic Command being transmitted to the drive by this adapter from the controller 3 Reference The present value of the Reference being transmitted to the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 4 Common Logic Sts The present value of the Common Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter 5 Prod Logic Sts The present value of the Product Logic Status being received from the drive by this adapter to the controller 6 Feedback The present value of the Feedback being received from the drive by this adapter Note that a 16 bit value will be sent as the Most Significant Word of the 32 bit field 7 Datalink A1 In 8 Datalink A2 In 9 Datalink B1 In 10 Datalink B2 In The present value of respective Datalink In being transmitted to the drive by this adapter If not using a Datalink 11 Datalink C1 In this parameter should have a value of zero 12 Datalink C2 In 18 Datalink D1 In 14 Datalink D2 In 15 Datalink A1 Out 16 Datalink A2 Out 17 Datalink B1 Out 18 Datalink B2 Out The present value of respective Datalink Out being received from the drive by th
250. quipment damage exists If the adapter is Set Parameter 22 Reset Module to 1 Reset Module Port 5 Device Value Description 20 COMM ER 0 Ready Default Parameter 22 1 Reset Module Reset Module 2 Set Defaults Reset Module Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 43 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter Viewing the Adapter Status Using Parameters Updating the Adapter Firmware When you enter 1 Reset Module the adapter will be immediately reset When you enter 2 Set Defaults the adapter will set all adapter parameters to their factory default values After performing a Set Defaults enter 1 Reset Module so that the new values take effect The value of this parameter will be restored to 0 Ready after the adapter is reset The following parameters provide information about the status of the adapter You can view these parameters at any time Parameter Description 17 EN P1 Rate Act The data rate used on port 1 of the adapter 19 EN P2 Rate Act The data rate used on port 2 of the adapter 20 Ref Fdbk Size The size of the Reference Feedback It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the device and the adapter automatically uses the correct size 21 Datalink Size The size of the Datalinks It will either be 16 bits or 32 bits It is set in the device and the adapter automatically uses the correct size
251. r Table of Contents About This Aida eu Cha tasse e e ee ibt a wae e els 7 Conventions Used in This Manual 1 52 ralis Asad na seasons 7 Rockwell Automation Support 3545s beze Dy ee eS Pee ps 8 Additional Resources T dd Stet uoripaer dd AI dade bod vitari DIE es 8 Chapter 1 COMPONCHTSS aiai sr 25 analy Sh sien pe we pales te hake heh oa ge Ree 11 ri RR PEE 12 Compatible Products x oio e oce a gored e ERE A 13 Required Equipment uico breues ras Hp ed Ua TE HUI ER 13 Equipment Shipped with the Adapter sseeuuuue 13 User Supplied Equipment 52425 eh uct vee ud eERA Aa le 13 Sitety Precautions oc voee Paetos mata vea abes Uri e 15 Me qu MN 16 Chapter 2 EMC Conformance s s eeu v xd eh op bd x i 17 Preparing for an Inscallatiohzs lt 4 52 ser estne de nada rue re nEPE 18 Setting the Web apes SWIICDo e sius ELE EH EET ERE EELIRE 19 Connecting the Adapter to the Drive or SMC 00 0005 20 Connecting the Adapter to the Network 00 000s eee eee 23 Applying POWER sous ee teet eek e terre UK NEE vec NER a M S eke 24 Start Up Status Indications 20 522 20 0 mee V db rae RA RA cues 24 Configuring and Verifying Key Drive Parameters 26 Commissioning the Adapter Vstusopet autores NES ua weed tories 26 Chapter 3 Gonfg tation T905 rer oe era ike put sls teur VE CAT MERE 27 Using the PowerFlex 7 Class EIEM ves eviseves ea onto eb Gor 28 Using an LED IME iu recedet didi d e RC PIED ta 28
252. r example drive running 1 Not writable when enabled 10 Instance 0 Parameter value is not a Reference to another parameter 1 Parameter value refers to another parameter 11 Uses Bit ENUM Mask This parameter instance supports the Bit ENUM Mask attribute For more information see the definition of the attribute 12 Decimal Place Bit 0 Number of digits to the right of the decimal point 13 Decimal Place Bit 1 0000 0 14 Decimal Place Bit 2 MM 15 15 Decimal Place Bit 3 16 Extended Data Type Bit 4 Right bit is least significant bit 16 17 Extended Data Type Bit 5 000 Reserved 18 Extended Data Type Bit 6 001 DWORD used as an array of Boolean 010 Reserved 011 Reserved 100 Reserved 101 Reserved 110 Reserved 111 Reserved 19 Parameter Exists Used to mark parameters that are not available to network tools 20 Not Used Reserved 21 Formula Links Indicates the Formula Data is derived from other parameters 22 Access Level Bit 1 A 3 bit field used to control access to parameter data 23 Access Level Bit 2 24 Access Level Bit 3 25 Writable ENUM ENUM text 0 Read Only 1 Read Write 26 Nota Link Source 0 May be the source end of a link 1 May not be the source end of a link 27 Enhanced Bit ENUM Parameter supports enhanced bit ENUMs 28 Enhanced ENUM Parameter supports enhanced ENUMs 29 Uses DPI Limits Object Parameter uses the DPI LImits Object 30 Extended Descriptor Parameter uses Extended Descriptor bits
253. r from the drive or SMC and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing the adapter Remove ALL power from the drive or SMC Use static control precautions Remove the drive or SMC cover or open the drive door rR WY N m Connect the Internal Interface cable to the DPI port on the drive and then to the DPI connector on the adapter see Figure 3 5 Secure and ground the adapter to the drive or SMC see Figure 4 by doing the following Ona PowerFlex 70 drive fold the Internal Interface cable behind the adapter and mount the adapter on the drive using the four captive screws Onan SMC Flex put the wire lug between the mounting screw and 20 COMM ER board Important Tighten all screws to properly ground the adapter Recommended torque is 0 9 Nem 8 0 Ibein Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Installing the Adapter Chapter 2 Figure 3 DPI Ports and Internal Interface Cables 20 COMM ER Adapter o Tel x o e n 00 0 Di o E I 99299909992099 E H B LJ Us o gt l 8 J
254. rFlex 7 Class DPI a Verify that the power control device is not powered Network Communication mE Adapter Installation b Connect the adapter to the device with the Internal Interface Instructions publication cable 20COMM INO04 and C Use the captive screws to secure and ground the adapterto Chapter 2 the device Installing the Adapter d Connect the adapter to the network with an Ethernet cable NOTE When installing the adapter in the DPI External Comms Kit see the 20 XCOMM DC BASE Installation Instructions publication 200OMM INO01 supplied with the kit 5 Apply power to the adapter Chapter 2 a Verify that the adapter is installed correctly Installing the Adapter b The adapter receives power from the drive or SMC Apply power to the device The status indicators should be green If they flash red there is a problem See Chapter 7 Troubleshooting c Configure and verify key drive or SMC parameters 6 Configure the adapter for your application Chapter 3 Set adapter parameters for the following functions as required by Configuring the Adapter your application e P address subnet mask and gateway address e Data rate 0 configuration Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy e Fault actions 7 Configure the controller to communicate with the adapter Chapter 4 Use a controller configuration tool such as RSLogix software to Configuring the I O configure the master on the network to recognize the adapter and drive or SMC
255. rameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW Parameter Number Parameter Value LSW Parameter Value MSW o e co 40 5014 C5 Io C pro a RENE 4A 05 n5 CO do 63 64 65 Response Destination Data Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Parameter Number Pad Word Pad Word Using Explicit Messaging Chapter 6 Explicit Messaging Using RSLogix 5000 Software All Versions ControlLogix Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Get Attribute Single message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current ina PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Table 22 Example Controller Tags to Read a Single Parameter Operand Controller Tags for Single Read Message Data Type XIC Execute Single Read Message BOOL MSG Single Read Message MESSAGE Figure 49 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter Execute_Single_Read_Message MSG JE Message CEN Message Control Single Read Message CDND LCER
256. rameter number Attribute 9 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Destination Output Current 5 The tag where the data that is read is stored Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Read Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 The instance is the parameter number in the drive Port 0 For example to read parameter 4 of a peripheral in Port 5 of an SMC 50 controller the instance would be 21504 4 21508 See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 to determine the instance number 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the I O Configuration folder 4 See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging 5 In this example Output Current is a 32 bit parameter requiring the Data Type field to be set to DINT when creating the controller tag If the parameter being read is a 16 bit parameter the tag Data Type field must
257. rameter values refer to Drive and Adapter Parameter Settings on page 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 69 Chapter 4 70 Configuring the 1 0 Creating RSLogix 500 Project Version 7 00 or Later To transmit read and write data between the controller and drive you must create message instructions that allocate data table addresses in the controller for Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and Datalinks Select the Controller 1 Start RSLogix 500 software The RSLogix 500 window appears 2 Select File gt New to display the Select Processor Type screen Select Processor Type Processor Name EXAMPLE Micrologix 1500 LSP Series B Cancel MicroLogix LSP Series MicroLogix Series C 1 or 2 Comm Ports Help MicroLogix Series MicroLogix Series Micrologix D MicroLogix Analog MicroLogix DH 485 HDSlave Bul 1761 MicroLogix 1747 L40A 24 115 VAC 16 RLY Out 1747 L40B 24 115 VAC 16 TRIAC Out 1747 L40C F 24 DC SNK In 16 RLY Out 1747 L40E 24 DC SNK In 16 TRANS SRC Out 1747 L40L 24 DC SRC In 16 TRANS SNK Out Communication settings Driver Processor Node Reply Timeout Ethernet 48 Decal Who Active 10 Sec 61 Octal 3 Assign a name for the processor In thelist select the MicroLogix 1100 Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application 6 Click OK The RSLogix 500 project window appears Rockwell
258. rameter values in a user set in NVS 4 Get NVS Link Value Checksum WORD Checksum of parameter links in a user set in NVS 5 Get First Accessible Parameter WORD First parameter available if parameters are protected by passwords A O indicates all parameters are protected 7 Get Class Revision WORD 2 DPI 8 Get First Parameter Processing Error WORD The first parameter that has been written with a value outside of its range A 0 indicates no errors 9 Set Link Command BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear All Parameter Links This does not clear links to function blocks Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 199 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 6 Get DPI Offline Read Full STRUCT of BOOL 32 Descriptor CONTAINER Offline minimum value CONTAINER Offline maximum value CONTAINER Offline default value STRING 16 Parameter name STRING 4 Offline parameter units WORD Online minimum parameter instance WORD Online maximum parameter instance WORD Online default parameter instance WORD Multiple parameter instance WORD Divisor parameter instance WORD Base parameter instance WORD Offset parameter instance BYTE Formula number BYTE Pad byte always zero WORD Help instance WORD Pad word always a value of zero CONTAINER Parameter value WORD Multiplier WORD Divisor WORD Base INT Offset 7 Get DPI Online Read Full ST
259. ransmitting I O that controls the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 173 Appendix B Adapter Parameters Parameter No Name and Description Details 23 Comm Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will take Values 0 Fault if the adapter detects that I O communication has 1 Stop been disrupted This setting is effective only if I O 2 Zero Data that controls the drive is transmitted through the 3 Hold Last adapter When communication is re established 4 Send Fit Cfg the drive will automatically receive commands over TYP Read Write the network again Reset Required No drive if I O communication is disrupted By default this parameter faults the drive You can set this parameter so that the drive continues to run however precautions should be taken to verify that the setting of this parameter does not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the drive verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameter 23 IN Comm Flt Action lets you determine the action of the adapter and connected 24 Idle Fit Action Default 0 Fault Sets the action that the adapter and drive will ta
260. reached without the adapter receiving consuming a message the adapter will respond with the action specified in Parameter 43 Peer Fit Action In an adapter receiving consuming peer I O the value of this parameter must be greater than the product of the value of Parameter 54 Peer Out Time in the adapter transmitting producing peer 1 O multiplied by the value of Parameter 55 Peer Out Skip in the adapter transmitting producing peer I O Peer Inp Enable Determines if peer I O input is on or off Peer Inp Status Displays the status of the consumed peer I O input connection Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Details Default Default Default Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Minimum Maximum Type Reset Required Default Values Type Reset Required Default Values Type ecOooocco 255 Read Write No 10 00 Seconds 0 01 Seconds 10 00 Seconds Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 On Read Write No 0 Off 0 Off 1 Waiting 2 Running 3 Faulted Read Only Parameter No 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 Name and Description Peer A Output Peer B Output Selects the source of the peer I O output data The adapter transmits this data to the network Important Changes to these parameters are ignored when Parameter 53 Peer Out Enable is set to 1 On Peer Out Enab
261. ric Set Attribute Service offers the choice of writing the data to the drive s Nonvolatile Storage NVS or the drives Random Access Memory RAM for Generic Set Attribute Single service only see page 133 Note that when selecting the data to be written to RAM the data will be lost if the drive loses power For supported classes instances and attributes see Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Explicit Messaging Using the Read Write Parameter Service MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Example Ladder Logic Program to Read a Single Parameter A Read Parameter message is used to read a single parameter This read message example reads the value of parameter 003 Output Current in a PowerFlex 7 Class drive Figure 53 Example Ladder Logic to Read a Single Parameter MSG Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG13 0 CDNO Setup Screen lt CER 25 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 125 Chapter 6 126 Using Explicit Messaging MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Read a Single Parameter Using Read Write Parameter Service Figure 54 Read Parameter Message Configuration Screens MSG MG13 0 1 Elements MSG MG13 0 1 Elements Ins Add Hop end Data Receive Data Del Remove Hop MultiHop Send Data Receive Data This Controller Channet 1
262. rite Reset Required Yes s 5 35 5 ai a a aq g ses s Bit ololo c Oom xi Definition 8 8 8 Z e 5 5 5 s s s 6 5 5 ulus al a s zzizaijoajonio Default x x x olo 00 1 Bit 7 6 5 413 2 1 0 38 M S Output Default xxx0 0001 Sets the Master Slave output data This data is Bit Values is Bed produced by the adapter and consumed by the u enang Master device for example scanner Uus Ruied oe rite Bit Definition alink A Output Used Used Used Datalink D Output o Cmd Ref Default Bit o Datalink C Output n Datalink B Output s x No o x Noi a x No o Dal 39 Ref Adjust Default 100 0096 Sets the percent scale factor for the Reference pagi Mie received from the network nun 00 0075 Type Read Write Reset Required No that changes to Parameter 39 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled ATTENTION To guard against equipment damage and or personal injury note Reference resulting in a change of speed 176 Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Parameter No 40 41 Name and Description Peer A Input Peer B Input Sets the destination of the peer I O input The adapter receives this data from the network and sends it to the drive Important Changes t
263. rkbench software DriveExplorer DriveExecutive Numbering Scheme The adapter parameters begin with parameter 01 For example Parameter 01 DPI Port is parameter 01 as indicated by this manual Explicit Messaging Parameter No Name and Description 01 DPI Port Displays the port to which the adapter is connected This will usually be port 5 02 DPI Data Rate 03 BOOTP DHCP address with a BOOTP server Displays the data rate used by the drive This data rate is set in the drive and the adapter detects it Configures the adapter to use BOOTP so that you can set its IP address subnet mask and gateway See Chapter 6 Using Explicit Messaging and Appendix C EtherNet IP Objects for details Details Default 5 Minimum 0 Maximum 7 Type Read Only Default 0 125 kbps Values 0 125 kbps 1 500 kbps Type Read Only Default 1 Enabled Values 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Type Read Write Reset Required Yes Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UM015B EN P July 2013 171 Appendix B 172 Adapter Parameters Parameter No 16 Name and Description IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Sets the IP address bytes for the adapter s network address when Parameter 03 BOOTP is set to 0 Disabled 255 255 255 255 IP Addr Cfg 1 IP Addr Cfg 2 IP Addr Cfg 3 IP Addr Cfg 4 Subnet Cfg 1 Subnet Cfg 2
264. rminal block with the Reference coming from the network Or you could set the drive to have its control come from the network with the Reference coming from another peripheral or terminal block Or you could set the drive to have both its control and Reference come from the network The following steps in this section assume that the drive will receive the Logic Command and Reference from the network 1 Use drive Parameter 090 Speed Ref A Sel to set the drive speed Reference to 22 DPI Port 5 2 If hard wired discrete digital inputs are not used to control the drive verify that unused digital input drive Parameters 361 Dig In1 Sel and 362 Dig In2 Sel are set to 0 Not Used 3 Verify that drive Parameter 213 Speed Ref Source is reporting that the source of the Reference to the drive is 22 DPI Port 5 This ensures that any Reference commanded from the network can be monitored by using drive Parameter 002 Commanded Speed If a problem occurs this verification step provides the diagnostic capability to determine whether the drive adapter or the network is the cause To commission the adapter you must set a unique IP address on the network After installing the adapter and applying power you can set the IP address by using a BOOTP DHCP server or adapter parameters See Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 32 for details By default the adapter is configured so that you
265. rs EtherNet IP Media Planning and Installation Manual ODVA publication 148 1 EtherNet IP Network Infrastructure Guidelines ODVA publication 35 1 Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual publication ENET RM002 Information on the planning installation and techniques used to implement an EtherNet IP network Connected Components Workbench website http Avww ab com support abdrives webupdate software html and online help Information on the Connected Components Workbench software tool and includes a link for free software download PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 A5 C3S C5S HIM Quick Reference publication 20HIM QRO01 Information on the use of the PowerFlex 20 HIM A3 20 HIM A5 20 HIM C3S and 20 HIM C5S HIMs PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 C6S HIM Human Interface Module User Manual publication 20HIM UMO01 Information on the installation and use of the PowerFlex 20 HIM A6 and 20 HIM C6S HIMs PowerFlex 70 User Manual publication 20A UMO001 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 70EC 700VC Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM004 Information on installing programming and technical data of PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 70EC drives PowerFlex 700 Series A User Manual publication 20B UM001 PowerFlex 700 Series B User Manual publication 20B UM002 PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM001 PowerFlex 70EC 700VC Reference Manual publication PFLEX RM004
266. ry default settings local to the adapter e Cease communications on all communication ports The Port Status LED shall transition to blinking red The Network Status LED shall transition to off The purpose of the above behavior is to prevent the user from resetting the module and then never changing the switch setting from 888 Upon the next power up the module would simply reset itself again If you encounter unexpected communications problems the adapter s diagnostic items may help you or Rockwell Automation personnel troubleshoot the problem Adapter diagnostic items can be viewed with any of these drive configuration tools LCD PowerFlex 7 Class HIM Diagnostics Device Items Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later e DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later e DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Using the HIM to View Adapter Diagnostic Items Step 1 Access parameters in the adapter See Using the PowerFlex 7 Class HIM on page 28 Example Screen 2 Press the or key to scroll to Diagnostics Main Menu 3 Press the Enter key to display the Diagnostics menu in the adapter Parameter 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the Device Items option Device Select 5 Press the or GD key to scroll through the items Device Item 3 Reference Table 24 Ada
267. ry or death Remove all power from the PowerFlex drive or SMC and then verify power has been discharged before installing or removing an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Only personnel familiar with drive and power products and the associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up configuration and subsequent maintenance of the product using an adapter Failure to comply may result in injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION Risk of equipment damage exists The adapter contains electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive parts that can be damaged if you do not follow ESD control procedures Static control precautions are required when handling the adapter If you are unfamiliar with static control procedures see Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage publication 8000 4 5 ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists If the adapter is transmitting control 1 0 to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting an adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists Parameters 21 Comm Fit Action 24 Idle Fit Action and 43 Peer Fit Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected drive if communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the drive You may configure these parameters so that the drive continues to run however precautions shoul
268. s Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x92 146 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device The total number of components can be read in Instance 0 Class Attribute 4 Instances Hex Dec Device Example Description 0x0000 Ox3FFF 0 16383 Host 0 Class Attributes Drive 0x4000 0x43FF 16384 17407 Adapter 1 Drive Component 1 0x4400 0x47FF 17408 18431 DPI Port 1 2 Drive Component 2 0x4800 Ox4BFF 18432 19455 DPI Port 2 0x4C00 Ox4FFF 19456 20479 DPI Port 3 16384 Class Attributes Adapter 0x5000 0x53FF 20480 21503 DPIPort4 16385 Adapter Component 1 0x5400 Ox57FF 21504 22527 DPI Port 5 0x5800 OxSBFF 22528 23551 DPI Port6 0x5C00 OxSFFF UU 22552 24575 DPI Port 7 0x6000 0x63FF 24576 25599 DPI Port 8 0x6400 0x67FF 25600 26623 DPIPort9 0x6800 Ox6BFF 26624 27647 DPI Port 10 0x6C00 Ox6FFF 27648 28671 DPI Port 11 0x7000 0x73FF 28672 29695 DPI Port 12 0x7400 0x77FF 29696 30719 DPI Port 13 0x7800 Ox7BFF 30720 31743 DPI Port 14 1 These instances are supported only when the adapter is used with a PowerFlex 750 Series drive Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Family Code BYTE 0x00 DPI Peripheral 0x30 PowerFlex 70 0x
269. s Execute_DH 190 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Instances Supports Instance 1 Class Attributes Not supported Instance Attributes Not supported Message Structure for Execute PCCC EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Request Response Name DataType Description Name DataType Description Length USINT Length of requestor ID Length USINT Length of requestor ID Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Vendor UINT Vendor number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Serial UDINT ASA serial number of requestor Number Number Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Other Product Identifier of user task etc on the requestor Specific Specific CMD USINT Command byte CMD USINT Command byte STS USINT 0 STS USINT Status byte TNSW UINT Transport word TNSW UINT Transport word Same value as the request FNC USINT Function code not used for all CMDs EXT_STS USINT Extended status not used for all CMDs PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific parameters PCCC ARRAY of CMD FNC specific result data params USINT results USINT Message Structure for Execute DH Request Response Name DataType Description Name DataType Description DLink UINT Destination Link ID DLink UINT Destination Link ID DSta USINT Destination Station number DSta USINT Destination Station number DUser USINT Destination User number DUser U
270. s on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will input that Datalink s information from the controller Parameter 38 M S Output turns on the enabled Datalink bit so the 20 COMM ER adapter will output that Datalink s information to the controller 7 Click OK on the Module Definition screen to save the drive and adapter configuration and close the screen The drive s New Module screen reappears Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 8 Onthe New Module screen click the Connection tab Wil Module Properties My_EtherNet_IP_Bridge PowerFlex 70 EC E 3 2 General Connection Module Info Pott Configuration Drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 200 2 ms 20 3899 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Made Screen for RSLogix 5000 software version Module Fault 16 00 or 17 00 Status Offline Cancel M New Module General Connection Module Info Port Configuration Drive Requested Packet Interval RPI 20 0 ms 2 0 9999 3 Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Use Unicast Connection over EtherNet IP Scre en for RSLogix 5000 software version 18 00 or later Module Fault Status Creating OK Cancel Help 9 In the Requested Packet Interval RPI box set the value to 5 0 milliseconds
271. scription 90 Speed Ref A Sel 22 DPI Port 5 Assigns 20 COMM ER to be used for the Reference 300 Data In A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 301 Data In A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 302 Data In B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 303 Data In B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 304 Data In C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 305 Data In C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 306 Data In D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 307 Data In D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 310 Data Out A1 140 Points to Par 140 Accel Time 1 311 Data Out A2 142 Points to Par 142 Decel Time 1 312 Data Out B1 100 Points to Par 100 Jog Speed 313 Data Out B2 155 Points to Par 155 Stop Mode A 314 Data Out C1 101 Points to Par 101 Preset Speed 1 315 Data Out C2 102 Points to Par 102 Preset Speed 2 316 Data Out D1 103 Points to Par 103 Preset Speed 3 317 Data Out D2 104 Points to Par 104 Preset Speed 4 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 10 91 100 79 IP address for the adapter 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 08 Subnet Cfg 1 255 255 248 0 Subnet mask for the adapter 11 Subnet Cfg 4 23 DPI I O Cfg xxxi 1111 Enables Cmd Ref and Datalinks A D 35 M S Input xod 1111 Configures the I O Data to be transferred from the controller on the network to the drive 36 M S Output xd 1111 Configures the I
272. single parameter This write message example writes a value to parameter 140 Accel Time 1 ina PowerFlex 7 Class drive Important See Table 17 on page 106 for limitations of PowerFlex 7 Class drives when using Class code 0x93 for explicit messaging Figure 65 Example Ladder Logic to Write a Single Parameter MSG Read Write Message EN MSG File MG14 0 CDN Setup Screen lt CER 5 MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Formatting a Message to Write a Single Parameter Using Generic Get Set Attribute Service Figure 66 Generic Set Attribute Single Message Configuration Screens z 1 Elements Send Data Receive Data Ins Add Hop Del Remove Hop From Device From Port To Address Type To Address EtherNet IP Device str 10 91 100 73 MSG MG14 0 1 Elements MultiHop Send Data Receive Data iis Controller Control Bits Channel 7 Integral lanore if timed out TO Communication Command CIP Generic Break Connection BK Send Ni Awaiting Execution Ew Size in Bytes Receive N A Send Error ER Target Device 7 Message done DN Message Timeout 833 1 Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Local Remote Local MuliHop Extended Routing Info File RIX RiIx16 0 Service Service Code hex Class hex 93 dec 147 Instance hex aC dec 140 Attribute hex 8 deck
273. splay the Add New RSLinx Driver screen Use the default name or type a new name and click OK The Configure driver screen appears 5 Depending on your application select either the browse local or remote subnet option 6 Click OK Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 47 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 The Configure Drivers screen reappears with the new driver in the Configured Drivers list Configure Drivers Available Driver Types EtherNet IP Driver Configured Drivers Name and Description Status AB_ETHIP 1 A B Ethernet RUNNING Running 7 Click Close to close the Configure Drivers screen 8 Keep RSLinx running and verify that the computer recognizes the drive a Select Communications gt RSWho b In the menu tree click next to the Ethernet driver If the EtherNet IP driver cannot see your drive as an alternative use either the Ethernet devices or Remote Devices via Linx Gateway RSLinx driver ControlLogix Controller After the adapter is configured the connected drive and adapter will be a single Ex amp le node on the network This section provides the steps needed to configure a simple EtherNet IP network see Figure 8 In our example we will configure a ControlLogix controller with 1756 ENBT Series A bridge to communicate with a drive using Logic Command Status Reference Feedback and 16 Datalinks 8 to read and 8 to write over the net
274. stances WORD Maximum number of alarms that the device can record in its queue 3 Set Alarm Command Write BYTE 0 No Operation 1 Clear Alarm 2 Clear Alarm Queue 3 Reset Device 4 Get Fault Data List STRUCT of Reserved BYTE BYTE WORD n 5 Get Number of Recorded Alarms WORD Number of alarms in the queue A 0 indicates the alarm queue is empty Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 0 Get Full All Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRING 16 Alarm text STRUCT of Alarm time stamp WORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved WORD Reserved CONTAINER n Reserved 1 Get Basic Information STRUCT of WORD Alarm code STRUCT of Alarm source BYTE DPI port BYTE DPI Device Object STRUCT of Alarm time stamp LWORD Timer value 0 timer not supported BOOL 16 BOOL 0 0 invalid data 1 valid data BOOL 1 0 elapsed time 1 real time BOOL 2 15 Reserved 2 Get International Alarm Text STRINGN Text describing the alarm with support for Unicode DPI Diagnostic Object Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal 0x99 153 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B
275. t Port 2 Class Attributes The following class attributes will be supported Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Value 1 Get Revision UINT 3 2 Get Max Instance UINT 2 3 Get Number of Instances UINT 2 Instance Attributes Two instances of the Ethernet Link Object will be supported AttributelD Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Get Interface Speed UDINT 10 or 100 megabits per second Mbs 2 Get Interface Flags DWORD See EtherNet IP specifications 3 Get Physical Address Array of 6 MAC address USINTs 4 Get Interface Counters STRUCT of UDINT In Octets UDINT In Ucast packets UDINT In NUcast packets UDINT In Discards UDINT In Errors UDINT In Unknown Protos UDINT Out Octets UDINT Out Ucast packets UDINT Out NUcast packets UDINT Out Discards UDINT Out Errors Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 213 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 5 Get Media Counters STRUCT of RX Received TX Transmitted DWORD RX frames not having integral number of octets long DWORD RX frames not passing FCS check DWORD TX frames having one collision DWORD TX frames having multiple collisions DWORD Number of times of SQE test error message DWORD TX Frames delayed first attempt by busy medium DWORD Collisions detected later than 512 bit times in trans DWORD TX frames failing due to excessive collisions DWORD TX frames failing due to
276. t Revision WORD 1 2 Get Max Instance WORD Number of parameters 8 Get Parameter Class Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 0 Supports parameter instances Bit 1 Supports full attributes Bit 2 Must do NVS save command Bit 3 Parameters are stored in NVS 9 Get Configuration Assembly Instance WORD 0 10 Set Native Language BYTE 0 English 1 French 2 Spanish 3 Italian 4 German 5 Japanese 6 Portuguese 7 Mandarin Chinese 8 Russian 9 Dutch 186 Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 EtherNet IP Objects Appendix C Instance Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Parameter Value 2 Get Link Path Size BYTE 0 No link specified n The size of Attribute 3 in bytes 3 Get Link Path 9 4 Get Descriptor WORD 0 False 1 True Bit 1 Supports ENUMs Bit 2 Supports scaling Bit 3 Supports scaling links Bit 4 Read only Bit 5 Monitor Bit 6 Extended precision scaling 5 Get Data Type BYTE 1 WORD 16 bit 2 UINT 16 bit 3 INT 16 bit 5 SINT 6 DINT 8 USINT 9 UDINT 11 REAL 22 SHORT_STRING 24 BYTE 25 DWORD 6 Get Data Size BYTE 3 7 Get Parameter Name String SHORT_STRING 3 8 Get Units String SHORT STRING 3 9 Get Help String SHORT STRING Null string 10 Get Minimum Value 9 3 11 Get Maximum Value 9 3 12 Get Default Value 9 3 13 Get Scaling Multiplier WORD
277. t Speed Feedback and My PowerFlex Diivel Data12 INT Datalink Out B2 LSW Datalinks My PowerFlex Drive l Data 13 INT Datalink Out B2 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 14 INT Datalink Qut C1 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 15 INT Datalink Qut C1 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 16 INT Datalink Qut C2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 17 INT Datalink Qut C2 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 18 INT Datalink Qut D1 LS My PowerFlex Drive l Data 19 INT Datalink Out D1 MSW My PowerFlex Drivel Data 20 INT Datalink Out D2 LSW My PowerFlex Drive l Data 21 INT Datalink Qut D2 MSW Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 91 Chapterb Using the 0 Figure 24 ControlLogix Output Image for Drive Generic Profile Example Ladder Logic Program Name amp DataType Description My _PowerFlex_Drive 0 AB ETHER My PowerFlex Drive D Data INT 10 Dutput Image My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 0 INT Logic Command My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 1 INT Speed Reference z My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 2 INT Datalink In A1 PowerFlex 70 Drive My PowerFlex_Drive O Data 3 INT Datalink In A2 16 bit Speed Reference and My PowerFles Drive O Data 4 INT Datalink In B1 Datalinks My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 5 INT Datalink In B2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 6 INT Datalink In C1 My PowerFlex Drive O Data INT Datalink In C2 My_PowerFlex_Drive 0 Data 8 IN
278. t abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided as is for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later A Lite version of DriveExecutive software ships with RSLogix 5000 RSNetWorx MD FactoryTalk AssetCentre and Itell iCENTER software All other versions are purchasable items e 9303 ADTEOIENE Drive Executive software 9303 DTSOI1ENE DriveTools SP Suite includes DriveExecutive and DriveObserver software e 9303 4DTE2S01ENE DriveExecutive software upgrade to DriveTools SP Suite adds DriveObserver software DriveExecutive software updates patches and so forth can be obtained at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html It is highly recommended that you periodically check for and install the latest update BOOTP server version 2 1 or higher for network setup only Q Controller configuration software such as RSLogix 5 500 5000 Q A computer connection to the EtherNet IP network Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Getting Started Chapter 1 Safety Prec autions Please read the following safety precautions carefully gt e BB gt gt ATTENTION Risk of injury or death exists The PowerFlex drive may contain high voltages that can cause inju
279. t changes to adapter Parameter 39 Ref Adjust take effect immediately A drive receiving its Reference from the adapter will receive the newly scaled Reference resulting in a change of speed If the adapter is receiving a Reference set Parameter 39 Ref Adjust to the desired scaling factor Port 5 Device Default 100 00 20 COMM ER Parameter 39 Ref Adjust 100 00 0 00 lt gt 200 00 The adjustment takes effect as soon as it is entered By default when I O communication is disrupted for example a cable is disconnected or the controller is idle in program mode or faulted the drive responds by faulting if it is using I O from the network You can configure a different response to these events Disrupted I O communication by using Parameter 23 Comm Flt Action e An idle controller by using Parameter 24 Idle Flt Action Comm Fit Action and 24 Idle Flt Action let you determine the action of the adapter and connected device if I O communication is disrupted or the controller is idle By default these parameters fault the device You can set these parameters so that the device continues to run however precautions should be taken to ensure that the settings of these parameters do not create a risk of injury or equipment damage When commissioning the device verify that your system responds correctly to various situations for example a disconnected cable or faulted controller
280. t manually enter it 7 Edit the following Box Type IP Address A unique IP address for the adapter Host Name Optional Description Optional 8 Click OK to apply the settings The adapter appears in the Relation List with the new settings B3 BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History hr min sec Ethemet Address MAC 13 31 00 00 00 BC 08 60 09 13 30 59 00 00 BC 08 60 09 13 30 54 00 00 60 09 13 30 51 Type IP Address 10 91 100 79 Hostname 20COMME621A 0 00 00 8C 08 60 09 Relation List New Ethemet Address MAC 00 00 BC 08 60 09 IP Address 10 91 100 79 Hostname 20COMME621A Description Bldg 6 Floor 2 Fan 1A Entries D of 256 9 To assign this configuration to the adapter permanently select the device in the Relation List and click Disable BOOTP DHCP When power is cycled on the adapter it will use the configuration you assigned it and not issue new BOOTP requests TIP To enable BOOTP for an adapter that has had BOOTP disabled first select the adapter in the Relation List then click Enable BOOTP and lastly reset the adapter or power cycle the drive Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 31 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter 10 Select File Save to save the Relation List Setting the IP Address By default the adapter is configured so that you set its IP address subnet mask and gateway address
281. t of the address 0 1 7 15 23 31 Class A 0 Network ID Host ID 0 1 7 15 23 31 ClassB 1 0 Network ID Host ID 012 7 15 23 31 Class C 1 1 0 Network ID Host ID The number of devices on your EtherNet IP network will vary depending on the number of bytes that are used for the network address In many cases you are given a network with a Class C address in which the first three bytes contain the network address subnet mask 255 255 255 0 This leaves 8 bits or 256 addresses on your network Because two addresses are reserved for special uses 0 is an address for the network usually used by the router and 255 is an address for broadcast messages to all network devices you have 254 addresses to use on a Class C address block To ensure that each device on the Internet has a unique address contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider for unique fixed IP addresses You can then set the unique IP address for the adapter by using a BOOTP server or by manually configuring parameters in the adapter The adapter reads the values of these parameters only at powerup Logic Command Logic Status The Logic Command is used to control the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example start stop and direction It consists of one 16 bit word of output to the adapter from the network The definitions of the bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D The Logic Status is
282. tal Regulatory Compliance 170 Dimensions Height 19 mm 0 75 inches Length 86 mm 3 39 inches Width 78 5 mm 3 09 inches Shipping Weight 150 g 5 2 oz Temperature Operating 10 50 C 14 122 F Storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Atmosphere Important The adapter must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the adapter is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Certification Drive Specification SMC Specification UL UL508C UL508 cUL CSA C22 2 No 14 2010 CSA C22 2 No 14 10 CE EN61800 3 EN60947 4 2 CTick EN61800 3 EN60947 4 2 NOTE This is a product of category C2 according to IEC 61800 3 In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required Rockwell Automation Publication 20COMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 About Parameter Numbers Parameter List Adapter Parameters Appendix B This appendix provides information about the adapter parameters Topic Page About Parameter Numbers 171 Parameter List TFA The parameters in the adapter are numbered consecutively However depending on which configuration tool you use they may have different numbers Configuration Tool HIM Connected Components Wo
283. ted in USA
284. ten Sec nders neme Sener or neme Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 161 Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages 182 Email Configuration Link The Configure E mail Notification web page contains selections and data fields for configuring the adapter to automatically send email messages to desired addresses when selected types of events occur To view this web page click the Configure e mail link highlighted in Figure 92 in the navigation pane Figure 92 E mail Configuration Page Pe ce wew Puvortes lods reb i Pevortes os cn Environmental Serwces ML c LEVEL The Rodwell Auto Quality Esvironmenta and Rockwel Automation To configure email notification perform the following steps 1 Click the desired Send an e mail message when check boxes you want to occur that will send email notification If you only want email notification when selected faults alarms occur a Click the respective fault and or alarm radio buttons b Click the selected faults link and or selected alarms link Figure 93 shows an example faults configuration page Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 Figure 93 Example of Selected Faults Configuration Page ows Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation De CA yw rote Joos eb wp Fevortes aa c Environmental Sereces MI c LEVEL T Th
285. the EtherNet IP specification for more information about EtherNet IP objects Information about the EtherNet IP specification is available on the ODVA web site http www odva org Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 181 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Supported Data Types Data Type Description BOOL 8 bit value low bit is true or false BOOL n Array of n bits BYTE 8 bit unsigned integer CONTAINER 32 bit parameter value sign extended if necessary DINT 32 bit signed integer DWORD 32 bit unsigned integer INT 16 bit signed integer LWORD 64 bit unsigned integer REAL 32 bit floating point SHORT_STRING 1 byte length indicator that many characters SINT 8 bit signed integer STRING n Array of n characters STRUCT Structure name only no size in addition to elements TCHAR 8 or 16 bit character UDINT 32 bit unsigned integer UINT 16 bit unsigned integer USINT 8 bit unsigned integer WORD 16 bit unsigned integer Identity Object Class Code Hexadecimal _ Decimal 0x01 1 Services Implemented for Service Code Class Instance Service Name 0x05 No Yes Reset OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x01 Yes Yes Get Attributes All Instances The number of instances depends on the number of components in the device connected to the adapter This number of components can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class 1
286. the Parameter Object in the adapter Service Type 1 Parameter Write This service is used to write a parameter value Service Code 10 Hex Code for the requested service Class f Hex Class ID for the DPI Parameter Object Instance 140 Dec Instance number is the same as parameter number Attribute 1 Hex Attribute number for the Parameter Value attribute Source Element Accel Time 1 9 Name of the tag for any service data to be sent from the scanner or bridge to the adapter drive Source Length 2n Number of bytes of service data to be sent in the message Communication Tab Example Value Description Path 9 My PowerFlex Drive The path is the route that the message will follow Tag Tab Example Value Description Name Single Write Message The name for the message 1 The default setting for Service Type is Custom enabling entry of a Service Code not available from the Service Type pull down menu When choosing a Service Type other than Custom from the pull down menu an appropriate Hex value is automatically assigned to the Service Code box which is dimmed unavailable 2 Only drive parameters Port 0 can be written to using Parameter Object Class code OxOF To write to a parameter of a peripheral in another port use DPI Parameter Object Class code 0x93 see page 123 3 Click Browse to find the path or type in the name of the device listed in the 1 0 Configuration folder 4 In this example Accel
287. the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 47 and RSLinx online help for details 2 Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O OK box in the upper left of the screen should be steady green 3 Select File gt Save If this is the first time you saved the project the Save As dialog box appears Navigate to a folder type a file name and click Save to save the configuration to a file on your computer To be sure that the present project configuration values are saved RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to upload them Click Yes to upload and save the values 4 Configure any Datalinks in the drive for example Datalink parameters 300 317 in PowerFlex 70 drives that were enabled in the controller and adapter during I O configuration Table 2 Table 3 or Table 4 Each Datalink being used must be assigned to a specific parameter in the drive or connected peripheral If this is not done the controller will receive or send placeholder data instead of actual drive or peripheral parameter values 5 Place the controller in Remote Run or Run Mode Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 67 Chapter4 Configur
288. tion Rockwell Automation representatives are in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the following Sales and order support Product technical training Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P June 2013 Preface e Warranty support Support service agreements Technical Product Assistance For technical assistance please review the information in Chapter 7 Troubleshooting first If you still have problems then access the Allen Bradley Technical Support website at www ab com support abdrives or contact Rockwell Automation Additional Resources from Rockwell Automation Resource Industrial Automation wiring and grounding guidelines publication 1770 4 1 These documents contain additional information concerning related products Description Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system Product certifications website http www ab com Provides declarations of conformity certificates and other certification details Industrial Security Best Practices publication SECUR ATO001 Provides further information and guidelines on product and system security PowerFlex 7 Class DPI Drive Peripheral Interface Network Communication Adapter Installation Instructions publication 20COMM INO04 Information on the installation of PowerFlex 20 COMM x Network Communication Adapte
289. tion 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 167 Chapter 9 Using the Adapter in a DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE 168 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Appendix A Specifications This appendix presents the specifications for the adapter Topic Page Communications 169 Electrical 169 Mechanical 170 Environmental 170 Regulatory Compliance 170 Communications Network Protocol EtherNet IP Data Rates 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex Connection Limits 30 TCP connections Two class 1 connections and 14 class 3 connections are supported The following activities use a CIP connection Explicit messaging where connected is chosen for example in a checkbox in RSLogix 5000 The following activities do not use a CIP connection e Explicit messaging based control using PCCC or the Register or Assembly objects including the PLC 5 SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1100 examples in Chapter 4 e Explicit messaging where connected is not chosen which is typically the default Requested Packet 2 ms minimum Interval RPI Drive Protocol DPI Data Rates 125 kbps or 500 kbps Electrical Consumption Drive Network 482 mA at 5V DC supplied by the host drive or DPI External Comms Kit N A Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 169 AppendixA Specifications Mechanical Environmen
290. tion file for the controller MultiHop Tab Box Setting To Address 10 91 100 79 The IP address of the adapter connected to the drive 1 For details on data table addresses for this example project see Table 11 Table 14 starting on page 98 2 For details to determine element size for a specific drive see Understanding Controller Data Table Addresses on page 97 3 For N File details see N Files on page 192 TIP TIP This message will error out if the Control Timeout value is not changed from a non zero value Refer to page 71 for writing a value to the Control Timeout If the controller is controlling more than one drive it is recommended to intersperse the control 1 0 messaging for each drive to conserve network bandwidth and decrease response time That is sequence the message instructions for each drive so that its group of messages will occur at a different time than those for another drive Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Notes Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 71 Chapter4 Configuring the 1 0 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 About I 0 Messaging Chapter 5 Using the 1 0 This chapter provides information and examples that explain how to control configure and monitor a PowerFlex 7 Class drive or SMC using the configured I O Topic P
291. tion of machinery may occur Some devices maintain independent configuration settings that are not loaded to the device during the download of the controller Verify these devices drives network devices 3rd party products have been properly loaded before placing the controller into run mode Failure to load proper configuration could result in misaligned data and unexpected equipment operation Cancel Help Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 57 Chapter 4 58 Configuring the 1 0 TIP If a message box reports that RSLogix 5000 software is unable to go online select Communications Who Active to find your controller in the Who Active screen After finding and selecting the controller click Set Project Path to establish the path If your controller does not appear you need to add or configure the EtherNet IP driver with RSLinx software See Using RSLinx Classic Software on page 47 and RSLinx online help for details 2 Click Download to download the configuration to the controller When the download is successfully completed RSLogix 5000 software goes into the Online mode and the I O Not Responding box in the upper left of the window should be flashing green Also a yellow warning symbol 4 should be displayed on the I O Configuration folder in the treeview and on the drive profile If the controller was in Run Mode before clicking Download RSLogix 5000 software prompts you to change the
292. tomation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 Navigation Pane on Adapter Web Pages The navigation pane appears on the left side of the adapter Home Page and all of the adapter other web pages The navigation pane consists of links and link folders which can be expanded or minimized The following table shows all navigation pane links and link folders Navigation Pane Link Description Folder Home link Click this link to view the adapter s Home Page Figure 79 Process display link Click this link to view the host drive s Process Display pop up window Figure 81 Browse DPI devices folder Click this folder to expand and view the Port folders for all present DPI devices including the drive adapter and other devices connected to the drive such as a HIM Diagnostics Displays Ethernet IP diagnostic information to aid in monitoring and troubleshooting the Ethernet IP network Administrative Settings Manage adapter settings such as password IP address and network configuration Password Authorization is required to access subfolders Online user manuals link Click this link to view Rockwell Automation s web page with documentation for drives SMCs and other devices Software tools Web site link Click this link to view Allen Bradley s web page with information about software tools such as DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive Figure 80 Adapter Web Home Page Ex
293. tors They can be viewed on the adapter or through the device cover Indicators r Location on device may vary CQ OCO CO OOOOO o OOOOO OO OOO OOOOO LLL Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 143 Chapter 7 Port Status Indicator in the table below Status Cause Off No power Troubleshooting Item Indicator Name Description See o PS DPI Connection Status page 144 9 NS Network Status page 145 LS Link Status 1 page 145 OQ Lg Link Status 2 page 145 The LED indicates the status of the adapter s connection to the device as shown Corrective Action Securely connect the adapter to the drive using the internal interface ribbon cable Peripheral is Connected to an incompatible product Verify that cables are securely connected and not damaged Replace cables if necessary Orange or no DPI ping events are detected Cycle power to the device Verify that Host is an Allen Bradley compatible product Flashing Orange Requesting DPI I O Connections No action required this is normal operation if No DPI IO is enabled Flashing Green Normal Operation DPI connected No I O or PLC in Program Place the scanner in RUN mode Program the controller to recognize and transmit I O to the adapter Configure the adapter for the program in the controller Normal behavior if no DPI I O is enabled Norma
294. tting to take effect the adapter must be reset see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 Bit 0 of Parameter 57 Web Features is used to protect the configured settings for e mail messaging By default settings are not protected and the user can make changes To protect the configured settings set the value of E mail Cfg Bit 0 to 0 Disabled You can unprotect the configuration by changing Bit 0 back to I Enabled E mail messaging will always remain active regardless of whether or not its settings are protected unless e mail messaging was never configured For more information about configuring adapter e mail messaging or to stop e mail messages see Email Configuration Link on page 162 Port 5 Device Bit Description 20 COMM ER 0 E mail Cfg Default 0 Disabled Parameter 57 1 7 Not Used Web Features XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XPM E mail Cfg b00 Bit 0 is the right most bit It is highlighted above and equals 1 Changes to this parameter take effect immediately A reset is not required Changes to switch settings and some adapter parameters require that you reset the adapter before the new settings take effect You can reset the adapter by power cycling the drive or by using Parameter 22 Reset Module transmitting control 1 0 to the drive the drive may fault when you reset the adapter Determine how your drive will respond before resetting a connected adapter ATTENTION Risk of injury or e
295. tware tool has been discontinued and is now available as freeware at http www ab com support abdrives webupdate software html There are no plans to provide future updates to this tool and the download is being provided as is for users that lost their DriveExplorer CD or need to configure legacy products not supported by Connected Components Workbench software DriveTools SP Software A software suite designed for running on various Microsoft Windows operating systems This software suite provides a family of tools including DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later that you can use to program monitor control troubleshoot and maintain Allen Bradley products DriveTools SP software can be used with PowerFlex 7 Class and PowerFlex 4 Class drives and legacy drives that implement the SCANport communication interface Information about DriveTools SP software can be accessed at http www ab com drives drivetools Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 223 Glossary 224 Duplex Duplex describes the mode of communication Full duplex communication lets a device exchange data in both directions at the same time Half duplex communication lets a device exchange data only in one direction at a time The duplex used by the adapter depends on the type of duplex that other network devices such as switches support EDS Electronic Data Sheet Files Simple text files that are used
296. twork Figure 86 EtherNet IP Statistics Page ane ik oma ECT Fe e s isis rion De x Pox EE deferre ig trertmert etes ME LLL the Rca Ato Quy Emer ad ftra JE m tes sry ee ee Anen sraaey Pl Mena EtherNet IP Adapter Automation DLL ee 3 hE fa E LT sae Une te Tem 10 Mte docet 7 v pons Forced Speed ant Duplex Atonegotate State 2 Media Counters pons NN WeBeGeemPot2 000000000 m terors a z FCR eem LI gt Single Cotene a imola Cotwane D Varrone Conners a LI MAC Tronen brors k Frome Too torg MAC Meceve brors LI mance 0 X 7 222000 LUI a 908189 iis a T T E va SIUE e Ring Statistics link This page displays configuration and status of the network and identifies the ring supervisor if the Ethernet network is configured as a ring Figure 87 Ring Statistics Page zm ET zs e OE YNTET Halde 1 Be tA lods de feertes jig Erromara Serves ML LEVEL the idee Ado Quilty Enirormerta and lt T O com pee ev hh e IT 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter aT decente toteen Ketveshy I Ouable Aetrenh vat o Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 159 Chapter 8 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Crash Display Link Figure 88 Crash Display Page a L ale e fe ten 9z 1e8 1 108 eixiex A P fenes s m Drrcneert serons ML m LEVEL 1 The Rode Ako I Qulty Emerormenta ad ME toxin Autom
297. umer Register network to drive 3 Get Size WORD Size of register data in bits 4 Conditional Data ARRAY of BITS Data to be transferred 1 Forthis attribute the Access Rule is Get if Direction 0 The Access Rule is Set if Direction 1 Important Setting a Register object attribute can be done only when the Control Timeout class attribute 100 has been set to a non zero value Class Code Hexadecimal Decimal Ox0F 15 Services Service Code Implemented for Service Name Class Instance 0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_ All 0x05 Yes No Reset OxOE Yes Yes Get Attribute Single 0x10 Yes Yes Set Attribute Single 0x4B No Yes Get Enum String Rockwell Automation Publication 2000MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 185 AppendixC EtherNet IP Objects Instances The number of instances depends on the number of parameters in the DPI drive The adapter parameters are appended to the list of drive parameters The total number of parameters can be read in Instance 0 Attribute 2 Instance Description 0 Class Attributes 1 Drive Parameter 1 Attributes n Last Drive Parameter n Attributes n 1 Adapter Parameter 1 Attributes n m Last Adapter Parameter m Attributes D 1 nrepresents the number of parameters in the drive 2 m represents the number of parameters in the adapter Class Attributes Attribute ID Access Rule Name Data Type Description 1 Ge
298. upport download detail cfm ID 23390 See the Readme file and online Help for directions and more information If desired you can disable BOOTP and configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address with adapter parameters For details see Setting the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address on page 32 Configure the Adapter Using a BOOTP Server 1 On the adapter label note the adapter s hardware Ethernet Address MAC which will be used in step 6 2 On a computer connected to the EtherNet IP network start the BOOTP software Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 29 Chapter3 Configuring the Adapter The BOOTP Server window appears Ss BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 Fie Tools Help Request History hrmisec Type 13 31 00 13 31 00 13 30 59 13 30 54 13 30 51 Relation List eal ree santo eT preesse Ethemet Address MAC IP Address Hostname Description 3 Select Tools Network Settings to display the Network Settings window ETTTTTITUTE Request History EINER ea hrminsec Type Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Network Settings Defaults Subnet Mack Gatewy 10 91 96 1 PimayONS 131 200 78 4 255 255 248 Relation List New Ethemet Address MAC Ty SecondsyDNS 131 200 78 Domain Name na home ra int com tees Entries 0 of 256 To properly configure devices on your
299. uration tools to configure the adapter and connected host drive including the following tools PowerFlex HIM Human Interface Module on the drive or SMC if available Connected Components Workbench software version 1 02 or later DriveExplorer software version 2 01 or later DriveExecutive software version 3 01 or later RSLogix5000 version16 and later with Drives Add on Profile version 4 05 and later Additionally you can use a BOOTP DHCP server to configure the network address for the adapter Status indicators that report the status of the drive communications the adapter and network They are visible when the drive cover is open or closed Parameter configured I O Logic Command Reference and up to four pairs of Datalinks to accommodate application requirements Explicit Messaging support Master Slave or Peer to Peer hierarchy that can be configured to transmit data to and from either a controller or another PowerFlex drive or SMC on the network User defined fault actions to determine how the adapter and connected PowerFlex drive respond to the following I O messaging communication disruptions Comm FIt Action Controllers in idle mode Idle Flt Action Web pages viewed by using a web browser that show information about the adapter its connected host drive and DPI devices connected to the drive Configurable e mail messaging to desired addresses when selected drive faults occur and or are
300. urces 8 This manual provides information about the adapter and using it with PowerFlex 7 Class Architecture Class drives or Bulletin 150 SMC Soft Starters The adapter can be used with other products that support a DPI adapter such as the DPI External Comms Kit 20 XCOMM DC BASE See the documentation for your product for specific information about how it works with the adapter The following conventions are used throughout this manual Parameter names are shown in the format Parameter xx The xx represents the parameter number The represents the parameter name for example Parameter 01 DPI Port e Menu commands are shown in bold type face and follow the format Menu gt Command For example if you read Select File gt Open you should click the File menu and then click the Open command The firmware revision number FRN is displayed as FRN X xxx where X is the major revision number and xxx is the minor revision number The screen images in this manual resulted from using the following software RSLinx Classic software version 2 51 RSLogix 5000 software version 16 Different versions of the software may have screens that vary in appearance and differences in procedures Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 sales and support offices over 500 authorized distributors and over 250 authorized systems integrators located through the United States alone In addi
301. uring and monitoring controllers to communicate with connected devices It is a 32 bit application that runs on various Windows operating systems Information about RSLogix software can be found at http www software rockwell com rslogix Scanner A scanner is a separate module of a multi module controller or a built in component of a single module controller that provides communication with adapters connected to a network See also Controller Status Indicators LEDs that are used to report the status of the adapter network and drive They are on the adapter and can be viewed on the front cover of the drive when the drive is powered Subnet Mask An extension to the IP addressing scheme that lets you use a single network ID for multiple physical networks A bit mask identifies the part of the address that specifies the network and the part of the address that specifies the unique node on the network A I in the subnet mask indicates the bit is used to specify the network A 0 in the subnet mask indicates that the bit is used to specify the node For example a subnet mask on a network may appear as follows 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 255 255 255 192 This mask indicates that 26 bits are used to identify the network and 6 bits are used to identify devices on each network Instead of a single physical Class C network with 254 devices this subnet mask divides it into four networks with up to 62 devices each
302. used to monitor the PowerFlex 7 Class drive for example operating state and motor direction It consists of one 16 bit word of input from the adapter to the network The definitions ofthe bits in this word depend on the drive and are shown in Appendix D Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Glossary M Master Slave Hierarchy An adapter configured for a master slave hierarchy exchanges data with the master device Usually a network has one scanner which is the master device and all other devices for example drives connected to EtherNet IP adapters are slave devices On a network with multiple scanners called a multimaster hierarchy each slave device must have a scanner specified as a master N NVS Nonvolatile Storage NVS is the permanent memory ofa device Devices such as the adapter and drive store parameters and other information in NVS so that they are not lost when the device loses power NVS is sometimes called EEPROM P PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Command PCCC is the protocol used by some controllers to communicate with devices on a network Some software products for example DriveExplorer and DriveExecutive software also use PCCC to communicate Peer to Peer Hierarchy An adapter that is configured for a peer to peer hierarchy can exchange data with a device on the network that is not a scanner This type of hierarchy can be set up so that a scanner configur
303. using a BOOTP DHCP server To use adapter parameters Fe Mask and Gateway instead you must disable BOOTP DHCP and then set the associated adapter ress parameters The IP address can be set using the rotary switches on the adapter to an address from 1 254 that will be used as the lower byte of the IP address 192 168 1 xxx The Subnet mask will be set to 255 255 255 0 If the rotary switches are set to any invalid address 0 or gt 254 the address programmed in the adapter s internal data base will be used Disable the BOOTP Feature 1 Set the value of Parameter 03 BOOTP DHCP to 0 Disabled Port 5 Device Value Setting 20 COMM ER 0 Disabled Parameter 03 1 Enabled Default BOOTP Disabled Note The internal port used by the adapter is different for different products The examples here show port 5 used by the SMC Flex and drive products The SMC 50 uses port 4 2 Reset the adapter see Resetting the Adapter on page 43 After disabling the BOOTP DHCP feature you can then configure the IP address subnet mask and gateway address using adapter parameters Set an IP Address Using Parameters 1 Verify that Parameter 03 BOOTP DHCP is set to 0 Disabled 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the Adapter Chapter 3 2 Set the value of Parameters 04 IP Addr Cfg 1 through 07 IP Addr Cfg 4 to a unique IP address Port 5 Devi
304. value of 0 indicates to not limit the number of decimal places used 18 FP Max Decimals Bit 2 19 FP Max Decimals Bit 1 20 Extended Parameter Reference 0 Not an Extended Parameter Reference 12 Extended Parameter Reference An Extended Parameter Reference contains a reference to another parameter The value is formatted the same as an analog mode Indirect Selector parameter SSpppp where SS slot number of device to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing and pppp number of the parameter or diagnostic item to which this Extended Parameter Reference is pointing Note that an Extended Parameter Reference can only select parameters unlike an Indirect Selector An Extended Parameter Reference could be used to configure a Datalink or show the source of a Reference among other uses 21 Uses Rating Table Object This parameter has rating dependent defaults and limits that can be obtained from the Rating Table Object The Offline Read Full will include the default value for the smallest rating and limits that will accommodate the full range of values allowed in the family of devices using this particular combination of Family Code and Config Code The Online Read Full will include the rating dependent default and limit values for this particular combination of Family Code Config Code and Rating Code 22 Writable Referenced Parameter This bit must be zero unless the parameter is an Extended Parameter Reference If the parameter is an
305. was created with its Data Type field set to INT 15 Also the Source Length field on the Message Configuration screen must correspond to the selected Data Type in bytes for this example 30 bytes for an INT 15 array Scattered write messages always assume hat every parameter being written to is a 32 bit parameter regardless of its actual size Maximum length is 132 bytes or 66 words which equates to 22 parameters For parameter numbering see DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO015B EN P July 2013 117 Chapter 6 118 Using Explicit Messaging ControlLogix Controller Example Scattered Write Request Data In this message example we use the data structure in Figure 45 or Figure in the source tag Scattered Write Request to write new values to these parameter S PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Write Value 11 1 Sec 143 Decel Time 2 22 2 Sec 105 Preset Speed 5 33 3 Hz 106 Preset Speed 6 444 Hz 107 Preset Speed 7 55 5 Hz See DPI Parameter Object on page 198 Class code 0x93 for parameter numbering Figure 45 shows the parameter values Figure 45 Example Scattered Write Request Data for PowerFlex 7 Class Drive Name Value _ Data Type Scattered_Write_Request Scattered_Write_Request 0 Scattered_Write_Request 1 Scattered Write Request 2
306. work Figure 8 Example ControlLogix EtherNet IP Network IP Address 10 91 100 80 ControlLogix Controller with 1756 ENBT Bridge o gama IP Address 10 91 100 79 PowerFlex 70 Drive with 20 COMM ER Adapter SI S Bu o mimm Ethernet Switch aS Computer with Fi Ethernet Connection 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 2OCOMM UMO015B EN P July 2013 Configuring the 1 0 Chapter 4 Adding the Bridge to the I 0 Configuration To establish communications between the controller and adapter over the network you must first add the ControlLogix controller and its bridge to the I O configuration This procedure is similar for all RSLogix 5000 versions 1 Start RSLogix 5000 software 2 Select File gt New to display the New Controller screen New Controller Vendor Allen Bradley Type 175663 ControlLogix5563 Controller J x Revision 16 hd Cancel Redundancy Enabled Help Name v16 Example using 20C0MME Description Example showing how to control a PowerFlex 70 EC drive with a 20 COMM E EtherNet IP adapter using RSLogix 5000 v16 software Chassis Type 1756 47 7 Slot ControlLogix Chassis Slot 0 zi Create In C RSLogix 5000 Projects Browse a Choose the appropriate choices for the fields in the screen to match your application b Click OK The RSLogix 5000 window reappears with the treeview in the
307. x 755 drives Word Output I O Word Input I O 0 Logic Command 0 Pad Word 1 Not Used 1 Pad Word 2 Reference LSW 2 Logic Status 3 Reference MSW 3 Not Used 4 Datalink In A1 LSW 4 Feedback LSW 5 Datalink In A1 MSW 5 Feedback MSW 6 Datalink In A2 LSW 6 Datalink Out A1 LSW 7 Datalink In A2 MSW 7 Datalink Out A1 MSW 8 Datalink In B1 LSW 8 Datalink Out A2 LSW 9 Datalink In B1 MSW 9 Datalink Out A2 MSW 10 Datalink In B2 LSW 10 Datalink Out B1 LSW 11 Datalink In B2 MSW 11 Datalink Out B1 MSW 12 Datalink In C1 LSW 12 Datalink Out B2 LSW 13 Datalink In C1 MSW 13 Datalink Out B2 MSW 14 Datalink In C2 LSW 14 Datalink Out C1 LSW 15 Datalink In C2 MSW 15 Datalink Out C1 MSW 16 Datalink In D1 LSW 16 Datalink Out C2 LSW 17 Datalink In D1 MSW 17 Datalink Out C2 MSW 18 Datalink In D2 LSW 18 Datalink Out D1 LSW 19 Datalink In D2 MSW 19 Datalink Out D1 MSW 20 Datalink Out D2 LSW 21 Datalink Out D2 MSW MicroLogix 1100 1400 Controller Image The I O image for these controllers always has 19 words of output and 19 words of input However depending on the size of the device s Reference Feedback and Datalinks specific words in the I O image may not be used Table 8 Table 9 and Table 10 show the I O image when using various PowerFlex 7 Class driv
308. zed into the DPI groups defined for the specific device Figure 82 shows an example of an SMC 50 device acting as the DPI host on port 0 of the DPI network Figure 82 Example of an SMC 50 Controller Acting as DPI Host Rockwell Automation down Internet Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation zlelxl De QA Yee Frote pos d p ie Fevertes dy Dwoma Services ME LEVEL i he Rode Auto Quity Emvronmertal and dM tod aaan o come ppr mey tye E s 20 COMM ER EtherNet IP Adapter PW aai Jome Ll Pona cope Copyright 2010 Rockwall Automaton Inc AB Rights Reserved Parameters for the SMC 50 can be changed via the parameters web page by clicking on the Edit button near the bottom of the web page and entering the correct username and password when the authorization pop up window appears Rockwell Automation Publication 2070MM UMO15B EN P July 2013 Viewing the Adapter Web Pages Chapter 8 Note PowerFlex drives on the network will not allow parameters to be changed via the Parameter Web page Figure 83 Example of Parameter Web Page net Explorer provided by Rockwell Automation Qv ares De dt yew Fortes pes tb p werte pa Dovrinmental Services MIEL LEVEL E The Poem Auto Quilty Eromena and Rockwell Automation Aten sraey Bee eal aT ep GS ET Diagnostics Web Page The diagnostics web page provides the user with Adapter performance on the network detailing the

Dual-Port EtherNet/IP Communication Adapter User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents